CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 3 Democratic Process In India-II Objective Questions

Odisha State Board CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Solutions Unit 3 Democratic Process in India-II Objective Questions and Answers.

CHSE Odisha 12th Class Political Science Unit 3 Democratic Process In India-II Objective Questions

Multiple Choice Questions With Answers

Question 1.
The worse form of Regionalism is:
(a) State autonomy
(b) Secessionism
(c) Linguistic Regionalism
(d) Sons of the soil policy
Answer:
(b) Secessionism

Question 2.
Regionalism in its negative form means:
(a) Love of ones culture
(b) Love of Ones area
(c) Living in a region
(d) Giving primacy to local interests over national interests.
Answer:
(d) Giving primacy to local interests over national interests.

Question 3.
Regionalism can be checked by:
(a) Promotion of National Integration
(b) Spread of education.
(c) Rapid economic development
(d) All the above.
Answer:
(d) All the above.

Question 4.
Some Regionalism is:
(a) Evil
(b) National
(c) Unnatural
(d) Anti-national
Answer:
(b) National

Question 5.
Casteism adversely affects:
(a) Government-making
(b) Status group
(c) Social group
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 6.
Caste is a:
(a) Association
(b) Social group
(c) Kinship group
(d) Status group
Answer:
(c) Kinship group

Question 7.
Casteism can be checked by:
(a) Family
(b) legal Ban
(c) Religion
(d) Secularism and Education
Answer:
(d) Secularism and Education

Question 8.
Caste was described by» Jay Prakash Narayan as:
(a) Factor of politics
(b) Most major political party
(c) Source of Unity.
(d) Social symbol.
Answer:
(b) Most major political party

Question 9.
Communalism is:
(a) Inhuman conduct
(b) Social evil
(c) Mental disease
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 10.
Casteism is a:
(a) Social Evil
(b) Natural
(c) Moral Code
(d) Necessary Evil
Answer:
(a) Social Evil

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 3 Democratic Process In India Objective Questions

Question 11.
Communalism can be checked by:
(a) Military
(b) Police
(c) Government
(d) People
Answer:
(d) People

Question 12.
Communalism is the product of:
(a) Narrow and irrational outlook
(b) Politics
(c) History
(d) Social relations
Answer:
(a) Narrow and irrational outlook

Question 13.
What encourages communalism in society?
(a) Communal politics
(b) Communal thinking
(c) Communalization of history
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 14.
Communalism constitutes the biggest challenge to:
(a) Economy
(b) Public health
(c) National Unity and Integration
(d) Religious freedom
Answer:
(c) National Unity and Integration

Question 15.
What is weapon used by terrorism for facing the people to obey its command?
(a) Suppression and Dominance
(b) Militancy
(c) Terror
(d) Organized power
Answer:
(c) Terror

Question 16.
What is the basic means which the terrorists use for securing their narrow selfish goals?
(a) Violence
(b) Killings
(c) Force
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 17.
Terrorism can be tackled by which means:
(a) International law
(b) Collective global action
(c) State Terrorism
(d) Promotion of strong National Integration.
Answer:
(d) Promotion of strong National Integration.

Question 18.
Terrorism is:
(a) Anti-Liberal
(b) Anti-Democratic
(c) Anti-Human
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 19.
National Integration can be strengthened by which means?
(a) Efforts of the civil society
(b) Faith in Multi-culturism and secularism
(c) Value based education
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 20.
National Integration can be achieved by dependence upon which means?
(a) Social reforms
(b) Conscious collective efforts of the People
(c) Constitutional Directives
(d) State laws
Answer:
(b) Conscious collective efforts of the People

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 3 Democratic Process In India Objective Questions

Fill in the Blanks with Appropriate Words

1. Subjects that were placed on the Union List were ______, _______ and __________.
Answer: taxes, defence, and foreign affairs.

2. Subjects on the Concurrent List were ______ and ______.
Answer: forest and agriculture.

3. Economic planning by which both the state and the private sector played a role in development was called a _________ model.
Answer: mixed-economy

4. The death of _______ sparked off such violent protests that the government was forced to give in to the demand for the linguistic state of Andhra.
Answer: Potti Sriramulu

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 3 Democratic Process In India Objective Questions

True or False

1. At independence, the majority of Indians lived in villages.
Answer:
True

2. The Constituent Assembly was made up of members of the Congress party.
Answer:
False

3. In the first national election, only men were allowed to vote.
Answer:
False

4. The Second Five Year Plan focussed on the development of heavy industry.
Answer:
True

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Name the leader who played a historic role in negotiating with the rulers of princely states to join the Indian Union.
Answer:
Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel.

Question 2.
What is meant by Two Nation Theory?
Answer:
Two Nation Theory was propounded by Muhammad Ali Jinnah to create separate state for Muslims.

Question 3.
Mention the main recommendation of the State Reorganisation Commission of 1953.
Answer:
The main recommendation of the State Reorganisation Commission was to organise states on language basis and the boundaries of states could also reflect the linguistic aspects.

Question 4.
Which two languages were spoken in Bombay state before it was divided in 1960?
Answer:
Gujarati and Marathi

Question 5.
Name any four princely states that resisted their merger with the Indian Union?
Answer:
Junagadh, Hyderabad, Kashmir and Manipur.

Question 6.
How many princely states consisted at the time of independence of India?
Answer:
565 princely states.

Question 7.
What was meant by princely states?
Answer:
Princely states were ruled by princes who employed some form of control over their internal affairs under the supremacy of the British.

Question 8.
What was the basis of the report of States Reorganisation Commission?
Answer:
States Reorganisation Commission Report was based on the distribution of boundaries of states on language basis to reflect linguistic aspects.

Question 9.
Why were the states reorganised on linguistic basis in India in 1956?
Answer:
States were reorganised on linguistic basis in India in 1956 to maintain unity and integrity of the nation to avoid violence and conflicts among the people.

Question 10.
Whose speech was known as ‘tryst with destiny’?
Answer:
‘Tryst with destiny’ speech was delivered by the first Prime Minister of independent India Pt. Jawahar Lai Nehru while addressing special session of constituent Assembly as the midnight of 14-15 August 1947.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 3 Democratic Process In India Objective Questions

Question 11.
Name the states which decided to remain independent in place of joining India.
Answer:
Travancore, Junagadh, Hyderabad and Bhopal decided to remain independent.

Question 12.
In which Congress Session proposal for linguistic principles of reorganisation was accepted?
Answer:
Nagpur Congress Session of 1920.

Question 13.
Name the movement which demanded the separate province for Andhra region.
Answer:
The Vishal Andhra movement demanded that Telugu speaking areas should be separated from Madras Province of which they were a part and be made into a separate Andhra Province.

Question 14.
Why did Amritsar and Kolkata become communal zones?
Answer:
Amritsar and Kolkata became communal zones because Muslims did not wish to move into area of Hindus and Sikhs majority and on the other hand Hindus and Sikhs also wanted to stay away from the areas of Muslim predominance.

Question 15.
Define Globalisation.
Answer:
Globalisation refers to integration of an economy with the other country based on interdependence.

Question 16.
What is WSF?
Answer:
WSF is the World Social Forum, a global platform to bring together a wide coalition of human rights activists, environmentalists and women activists.

Question 17.
Identify any two consequences of the partition of India in 1947.
Answer:
1. Communal Riots took place as the people of one community were killed and maimed by the people of other community in the name of religion.
2. People went through immense sufferings as they were forced to abandon their homes and to secure temporary shelter in the refugee camps. Thousands of women were abducted on both sides of border.

Question 18.
Mention any two challenges that India faced just after independence.
Answer:
(i) Challenge to shape a nation
(ii) Challenges to establish democracy. Or
(iii) Challenge to ensure the development and well being of the entire society.

Question 19.
Name the original states from which the following states were carved out.
(a) Meghalaya (b) Gujarat
Answer:
(a) Assam (1972) (b) Bombay (1960)

Question 20.
Explain the role played by Sardar Patel in the integration of princely states into the Indian Union.
Answer:
Sardar Patel negotiated with the rulers of princely states and diplomatically merged most of them into the Indian Union i.e. there were 26 small states in today’s Orissa and 14 big states and 119 small states in today’s Gujarat.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 3 Democratic Process In India Objective Questions

Question 21.
Which state got divided on bilingual basis?
Answer:
Bombay got divided on bilingual basis consisting of Gujarat and Marathi speaking people. After popular agitation, the states of Maharashtra and Gujarat were created in 1960.

Question 22.
Name the leader who advocated separate state of Andhra Pradesh by observing fast unto death and participation in Salt Satyagraha.
Answer:
The leader Potti Sriramulu of Madras resigned from government job to participate in Salt Satyagraha and advocated equality in the society and demanded entry of dalits in temples of Madras as well as observed fast unto death since 19 October 1952 to create separate state of Andhra Pradesh

Question 23.
What was government’s approach towards the integration of princely states was based on three considerations?
Answer:
1. Most of the princely states willingly wanted to join Indian Union.
2. The government wanted to accommo-‘date plurality by adopting flexible approach
in dealing with the demand of the region.
3. The central government was so much concerned towards integration and
consolidation of territorial boundaries of Indian nation.

Questions 24.
Which interests were hidden behind the conflicts between Hindus and Muslims at the time of independence?
Answer:
Hindu and Muslim communities bear some political interests at the time of independence:
1. Muslim League demanded a separate nation for Muslims to protect the interests of Muslims only.
2. There were some Hindu organisations also which made efforts to look after the interests of Hindus only to make India a‘Hindu Nation’.

Question 25.
“India got independence under very difficult circumstances rather than any other country”. Justify thfe statement.
Answer:
India got independence in 1947 under very difficult circumstances:
1. Freedom came with the partition of the country.
2. The year 1947 became the year of unprecedented violence and trauma.
3. Still our leader faced all these challenges in an appreciable manner by accommodating regional diversities also.

Passage Based Questions With Answers

Passage 1.
Read the passage given below carefully and answer the following questions:
The interim government took a firm stance against the possible division of India into smaller principalities of different sizes: The Muslim League opposed the Indian National Congress and took the view that the States should be free to adopt any course they liked. Sardar Patel, India’s Deputy Prime Minister and the Home Minister during the crucial period, immediately after Independence, played a historic role in negotiating with the rulers of Princely States in bringing most of them into the Indian Union.

Question 1.
Which government has been referred to as the interim government?
Answer:
The Indian National Congress has been referred to as the interim government.

Question 2.
Why did the Muslim League oppose the Indian National Congress?
Answer:
The Muslim League opposed the Indian National Congress because it was of the view that the states should be free to adopt any course they liked.

Question 3.
What makes the role of Sardar Patel a historic one? Explain.
Answer:
Sardar Patel was India’s Deputy Prime Minister and the Home Minister during the
crucial period immediately following Independence. He negotiated with the rulers of princely states firmly but diplomatically and brought most of them into the Indian Union.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 3 Democratic Process In India Objective Questions

Passage 2.
Read the passage given below carefully and answer the questions:
We should begin to work in that spirit and in course of time all these angularities of the majority and minority communities, the Hindu community and the Muslim community- because even as regards Muslims you have Pathans, Punjabis, Shias, Sunnis and so on and among the Hindus you have Brahmins, Vaishnavas, Khatris, also Bengalees, Madrasis, and so on-will vanish. You are free; you are free to go to your temples, you are free to go to your mosques or to any other place of worship in this State of Pakistan. You may belong to any religion or caste or creed-that has nothing to do with the business of the State. — Mohammad Ali Jinnah.

Question 1.
Do you think that Jinnah’s statement contradicts the theory which was the basis of creation of Pakistan? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Jinhah’s statement does not con-tradict the ‘Two Nations’ Theory’ as he aimed at the creation of separate state for Muslims without any interference in other communities like Pathans, Punjabis, Shias and Sunnis.

Question 2.
What is the essence of Jinnah’s statement in this passage?
Answer:
The essence of Jinnah’s statement in this passage is his secular outlook regarding the protection and promotion of every community by giving freedom to practices one’s own beliefs (religiously).

Question 3.
To what extent did Pakistan live up to Jinnah’s expectations in this passage?
Answer:
Pakistan did not live up to Jinnah’s expectations because Pakistan became an orthodox Muslim country that did not respect the interests of other communities after independence.

Passage 3.
Read the passage given below carefully and answer the questions:
We have a Muslim minority who are so large in numbers that they cannot, even if they want, go anywhere else. That is a basic fact about which there can be no argument.. Whatever the provocation from Pakistan and whatever the indignities and horrors inflicted on non-Muslims there, we have got to deal with this minority in a civilized manner. We must give them security and the rights of citizens in a democratic state. If we fail to do so, we shall have a festering sore which will eventually poison the whole body politic and probably destroy it. —Jawaharlal Nehru.

Question 1.
Why did Jawaharlal Nehru want to deal with the Muslim minority in a civilized way?
Answer:
Because India adopted democracy which commits equal rights and opportunities to each and every human being in a place of dividing them.

Question 2.
Why this minority should be given security and rights on the same footing as 20 all others in a democratic system?
Answer:
It was argued by Jawaharlal Nehru not only for ethical and sentimental reasons but prudential reasons also to realize long-cherished goals and principles such as socialism, equality, and fraternity.

Question 3.
If this minority was not provided security and rights what kind of scenario is envisaged?
Answer:
If this minority was not provided security and rights it may affect:

  • Basic nature of the democratic system.
  • It is against the secular nature of India.
  • It may affect India’s foreign policy also.
  • It may threaten other minorities also.
  • Most important it may lead to the disintegration of the nation.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Long Answer Questions

Odisha State Board CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Solutions Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Long Answer Questions.

CHSE Odisha 12th Class Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Long Answer Questions

Long Type Questions With Answers

Question 1.
Explain any four components of India’s security strategy.
Answer:
(a)To strengthen its military capabilities.

  • India has been involved in conflicts with its neighbours as Pakistan in 1947-48, 1965, 1971, 1999 and China in 1962
  • In South Asian region, India is surrounded by nuclear armed countries.

(b) To strengthen international norms and institutions.

  • India’s first Prime Miniter J.L. Nehru supported Asian solidarity, disarmament, decolonisation and the UN as a forum to settle down international conflict.
  • It used non-alignment to help to carry out an area of peace outside the blocs.

(c) To meet security challenges within country.

  • Several militant groups from areas such as Nagaland, Mizoram, Punjab, Kashmir have sought to break away from India.
  • India has made efforts to preserve national unity by adopting a democratic political system by providing freedom of speech and expression along with the right to vote.

(d) To develop its economy:

  • India develops the way to lift vast mass of citizens out of poverty, misery and huge economic inequalities.
  • A democratically elected government is supposed to combine economic growth with human development without any demarcation between the rich and the poor.

Question 2.
Identify and explain any four new sources of threats to security.
Answer:
Four new sources of threats to security can be identified as follows.

  • Terrorism is a war against democrary and a crime against humanity. It refers to political violence that targets civilians deliberately and discriminately to use it as a weapon against national government. It has become a global phenomena because even superpower is not free from terrorist attacks.
  • Human rights are those basic conditions which an individual is supposed to enjoy as a human being. These rights include political rights, freedom of speech and expression, economic rights, social and civil rights and fights of indigenous people to lead as honourable and dignified life.
  • Global poverty refers to low economic growth, low national income and low standard of living of developing or least developed countries.
  • Health epidemic is a very serious threat to a country’s security because severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS), HIV-AIDS, bird flue etc. diseases spread across countries through migration business, tourism and military operations.

Question 3.
What is meant by Security? Mention any four components of Indian security strategy.
Answer:
At its most basic, security implies freedom from threats. Human existence and the life of a country are full of threats. We generally say that only those things that threaten ‘core values’ should be regarded as being of interest in discussions of security. Thus, security relates only to extremely dangerous threats- threats that could so endanger core values that those values would be damaged beyond repair if we did not do something to deal with the situation.

India’s security strategy has four broad components which have been used in varying combination from time to time.

  1. The first component was strengthening its military capabilities because India has been involved in conflicts with its neighbours – Pakistan in 1947-48,1965, 1971 and 1999 and China in 1962. Since it is surrounded by nuclear-armed countries in the South Asia region,
  2. India’s decision to conduct nuclear tests in 1998 was justified by the Indian government in terms of safeguarding national security.
    The second component of India’s security strategy has been to strengthen international norms and international institutions to protect its security interests.
  3. The third component of Indian security strategy is geared towards meeting security challenges within the country. Several militant groups from areas such as Nagaland, Mizoram, the Punjab and Kashmir among others have from time to time sought to break away from India. India has tried to preserve national unity by adopting a democratic political system.
  4. There has been an attempt in India to develop its economy in a way that the vast mass of citizens are lifted out of poverty and misery and huge economic inequalities are not allowed to exist.

Question 4.
Give a comparative analysis of Indian expenditure on traditional and non-traditional security.
Answer:

  • India spends more on traditional security than non-traditional because:
  • India has been involved in conflict with its neighbours as Pakistan in 1947-48, 1965,1971 and 1999 and China in 1962.
  • In South Asian Region, India is surrounded by nuclear armed countries. Hence, India’s decision to conduct nuclear test n 1990 was justified to safeguard national security.
  • India’s first tested nuclear device in 1974.
  • Though India has made efforts to develop its economy and an individual’s security from poverty but still it is lagging behind even now and we are supposed to make more efforts.

Question 5.
Mention and explain the components and India’s security strategy.
Answer:
India has faced traditional military and non-traditional threats to its Security that have emerged from within as well as outside its borders. Its security strategy has four broad components i.e.:

  • To strengthen its Military capabilities;
    Because:
    (a) India has been involved in conflict with its neighbours, as Pakistan in 1947¬48, 1965, 1971 and 1999 and China in 1962.
    (b) In South Asia Region, India is surrounded by nuclear armed countries. Hence, India’s section to conduct nuclear test in 1990 was justified to safeguard national security.
    (c) India first tested nuclear device in 1974.
  • To strengthen international Norms and international Institutions:
    (a) India’s first Prime Minister J.L. Nehru supported Asian solidarity, disarmament, decolonisation and the UN as a forum to settle down international conflict.
    (b) India signed Kyoto Protocol in 1997 to be a part of roadmap for reducing the emissions of greenhouse gases to check global warming.
  • To Meet Security Challenges within the Country.
    (a) Several militant groups from areas such as Nagaland, Mizoram, Punjab, Kashmir has sought to break away from India.
    (b) India makes efforts to preserve national unity by adopting a democratic political system by providing freedom of speech and expression along with the right to vote.
  • To Develop its Economy.
    (a) India develops the way to lift vast mass of citizens out of poverty, misery and huge economic inequalities.
    (b) A democratically elected government is supposed to combine economic growth with human development without any demarcation between the rich and the poor.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Long Answer Questions

Question 6.
Explain the areas of operation of non-traditional notion of security.
Answer:
Non-traditional concept of security includes human and global security covering a wide range of threats affecting human existence:
1 It does not cover only the states but also the individuals and communities also.
2. It emphasises on security on nature of threat and right approach to deal with the threat its sources can be identified as follows:

  • Terrorism refers to political violence to target civilians deliberately and discriminately to use it as a weapon against national government.
  • Human Rights refer to basic conditioons which an individual is supposed to enjoy as a human being as political rights, freedom of speech and expression, economic rights, social and civil rights to lead an honourable and dignified life.
  • Global poverty refers to low economic growth, low national income and low standard of living of developing or least developed countries.
  • Health epidemics is a very serious threat to country’s security because severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome (ARS), HIV, AIDS, bird flue diseases spread across countries through migration, business, tourism and military operations.

Question 7.
What is Traditional security?
Answer:
The traditional security paradigm refers to a realist construct of security in which the referent object of security is the state. The prevalence of this theorem reached a peak during the Cold War. For almost half a century, major world powers entrusted the security of their nation to a balance of power among states.

In this sense international stability relied on the premise that if state security is maintained, then the security of citizens will necessarily follow. Traditional security relied on the anarchistic balance of power, a military build-up between the United States and the Soviet Union (the two super powers) and on the absolute sovereignty of the nation state.

States were deemed to be rational entities, national interests and policy driven by the desire for absolute power. Security was seen as protection from invasion; executed during proxy conflicts using technical and military capabilities. As Cold War tensions receded, it became clear that the security of citizens was threatened by hardships arising from internal state activities as well as external aggressors.

Civil wars were increasingly common and compounded existing poverty, disease, hunger, violence and human rights abuses. Traditional security policies had effectively masked these underlying basic human needs in the face of state security. Through neglect of its constituents, nation states had failed in their primary objective.

In the historical debate on how best to achieve national security, writers like Hobbes, Macchiavelli and Rousseau tended to paint a rather pessimistic picture of the implications of state sovereignty. The international system was viewed as a rather brutal arena in which states would seek to achieve their own security at the expense of their neighbors. Inter-state relations were seen as a struggle for power, as states constantly attempted to take advantage of each other.

According to this view, permanent peace was unlikely to be achieved. All that states could do was to try to balance the power of other states to prevent any one from achieving overall hegemony. This view was shared by Writers such as E.H. Carr and Hans Morgenthau. More recently, the traditional state-centric notion of security has been challenged by more holistic approaches to security.

Among the approaches which seeks to acknowledge and address these basic threats to human safety are paradigms that include cooperative, comprehensive and collective measures, aimed to ensure security for the individual and, as a result, for the state. To enhance international security against potential threats caused by terrorism and organized crime, there have been an increase in international cooperation, resulting in transnational policing.

The international police Interpol shares information across international borders and this cooperation has been greatly enhanced by the arrival of the Internet and the ability to instantly transfer documents, films and photographs worldwide.

Question 8.
Identify various factors causing environmental degradation.
Answer:
Envirnomental Problem: Some of the notable problem of environment can be identified as under: –

  • Land Air And Water: Pollution of land and water has affected plants, animals and human beings. The quality of soil is deterionating resulting in the loss of agricultural land. The loss is estimated to be about five to seven million hectares of land each year. Soil erosion, as a result of wind and/or water, costs the world dearly. The recurring floods have their own peculiar casualties like deforestation, silt in the river bed, inadequate and improper drainage, loss of men and property. The vast oceans, after being turned into dumping grounds for all nuclear wastes, have poisoned and polluted the whole natural environment.
  • Population Growth: Population growth means more people to eat and breathe, and putting an excessive pressure on land and forest, and ultimately disturbing the ecological balance. Our growing population is putting pressure on land, leading to poor quality of productivity, deforestation (the loss of forest land so necessary for ecological balance and exitinction of wild life leading to imbalance in the ecological order, loss of wild life heritage and ultimately dwindling of several species. The growing population is not only a problem for the natural environment; it is a problem for any other aspect of environment, say, for example social, economic, political etc.
  • Urbanization: Urbanization is no less a source of pollution, and therefore, a threat to the environment. Urbanization means maddening race of people from villages to the cities. The net result of urbanization is dirt, disease and disasters. In a state of growing urbanization, environmental problem like sanitation, ill-heath, housing, water-supply and electricity keep expanding. On the other, the environmental degradation is caused in the rural life due to indiscriminate collection of firewood, overgrazing and depletion of other natural resources.
  • Industrialization: Industrialization coupled with the development of the means of transport and communication has not only polluted the environment, but also has led to the shrinking of the natural resources. Both ways, the loss is really heavy. Increasing level
    of heat fluxes, carbon dioxide and particulate, radioactive nuclear wastes and the like create environment hazards. On the other hand, the consumption of conventional source of energy leads to the loss of natural resource. We are building a world without caring for future generations.

Question 9.
What are the national and international commitment for environment protection?
Answer:
The growing awareness about environmental protection has resulted in new measures across the world. The late Prime Minister Mrs. Indira Gandhi was the only Head of Government, attending the 1972 Stockholm conference, which was called the “U.N. Conference on Human environment”. The Rio Conference 20 years later was called the “U.N. Conference on Environment and Development”.

It was Mrs. Gandhi who first pointed out that poverty was the greatest polluter and unless it was eliminated through national and international efforts it was futile to talk about protecting the planet from environmental disaster. UNDP, the World Bank and other institutions of the U.N. system are now advocating the elimination of poverty as the central task in sustainable development.

Indeed environmental and development polices are seen as complementing each other. The compulsions of development is certainly to be resolved. But any world order cannot be sustainable if three-fourths of its population continues to live in poverty. Environmental rights and developmental rights together constitute the democratic and human rights of all the people of the world.

The Montreal convention and the conventions on climate change; bio-diversity and forest adopted at Rio are important landmarks in the world movement for sustainable development and environmental protection. India has accepted these conventions and is taking systematic measures to implement them. An environmental action programme funded by U.N.D.P.is under implementation. There are 31 schemes for industrial pollution control approved by the World Bank, involving of US. $ 105 million.

On the anvil are common effluent plants for small industries located in a cluster, the big plants being looked after individually. Seventeen grossly polluting industries have been identified for environment control within a time schedule. For certain categories of industries, prior environment clearance is compulsory before they can be set up.

In regard to transport pollution apart from conversation measures, population free engines are being designed, some of which have already been introduced for two-wheelers, three-wheelers and some of the popular cars. A National Forestry Plan is in progress. Environmental Brigades, Afforestation Brigades and Ecological task Force have been organized by Non-government organizations (NGOs.) India’s wild life conservation projects have met with remarkable success.

India has a protected network of75 national parks and 421 wild life sanctuaries. The Tiger project has been a great success. India also has an elaborate law relating to the prevention of pollution of water, soil and air and a system of environmental audit of most industrial projects. While this is voluntary for most countries, India has a mandatory rule in this regard.

India is also engaged in serious and systematic efforts to develop alternative and renewable sources of energy like solar, wind and wave energy which are environment friendly. Emphasis is laid on solar energy on which some significant technological progress has been made. India is taking all these measures partially with international assistance.

Question 10.
Write about the justice of the poor against factories that pollute the Environment.
Answer:

  • Environmental Courts: Special courts are being set up to ensure speedy
  • Environment Friendly Products: The government is setting stringent standards for all products in the market. Those, which meet these standards of production and performance will be given the label of excellence like the ISI mark.
  • Unleading of Petrol: Refineries are being persuaded to make their petrol lead free. Indian petrol has the highest lead content, which creates major pollution through automobiles.
  • Ban on Harmful Pesticides: Eight chemical pesticides, of which DDT, BHC, Aldrin and Malathion are the main culprits have been isolated. There are now plans to replace them with safe biopesticides.
  • National Waste Management Council: The main task is to convert 40 million tones of fly ash, that lie as a mountain near thermal power plants into bricks, city garbage into energy and sewage into fertilizer.
  • Public Liability Insurance: This makes it mandatory for all companies to take out a public liability insurance to be paid in 48 hours.
  • Pollution by Motor Vehicles: Anti-pollution measures against motor vehicles are being strictly enforced. Vehicles not adhering to the standards prescribed are fined heavily and may even be asked to be off the road.
  • Hotel Near Sea Shore: Action has been taken against a large number of hotels which encroach beaches in flagrant violation of laws.
  • National River Action Plan: The proposal is to set up a National river authority which will plan policy for water use and waste management at the national level.
  • Solar Energy Commission: Since the energy sector is the major polluter, the idea is to create decentralized energy at the village level, instead of multiplying the mainstream producer.
  • No Smoking In Public Places: A ban is proposed on smoking in public places. The Delhi government has taken a lead in this direction, majors taken by India for environment pollution.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Long Answer Questions

Question 11.
What is sustainable development?
Answer:
The world commission on environment and development (the Brundtland commission) submitted its report entitled “Our common future in 1987. This report highlighted and popularised the concept of ‘sustainable development’. Sustainable development has been defined on meeting the needs of the present generation without compromising the need of future generations. All developmental activities involve some amount of environmental degradation.

What is required is to take into account the damage to environment as a result of development, and strike a balance between development and environmental protection. The aim should be to achieve sustainable levels of people’s welfare and development. The primary concern is how many people can ultimately be supported by environment and at what level of quality of life.

The mainstream greens scholars like Carr, Brown, Dala, Schumacher. Does not make sense and others, all lay stress on the “sustainability” of the environment together with development. The emphasis of the mainstream green’ are not on pollution, but on

  1. energy and its resource may be renewed, and be kept renewing,
  2. the waste be changed into raw-material, raw-material into waste, waste into raw- material: recycling of waste into raw material;
  3. gross national product and its growth targets need not be sought, but what should be sought is the satisfaction of real human needs’.

The greens say that growth means cancer, a cancer that threatens to spread worldwide and destroy all life. The concept of sustainable development is more about the environment and less about development; more about stability and less about change; more about restricting one’s wants and less about continuing material development more about the non-exploitative attitude towards environment and less about harnessing it; more about small communities and less about the larger ones.

It is not a concept of development with environment, but is environment without growth. Indeed, ecological degradation should stop. But why should the pace of development stop? A disciplined uses of environmental benefits go a long way for all round development. Scholars and activists assert that environmental degradation can be controlled and reversed only by ensuring that the parties causing the damage should be made accountable for their action and that they should participate in improving environmental conditions.

What is needed is a set of norms, which bring the demands of development and the compulsion of the environment closer to each other.

Question 12.
What is the objective of India’s National Environment policy?
Answer:
Ans. In India, environmental awareness gained importance in 1 970s after the UN-sponsored conference on the environment in Stockholm (1972). The Indian government took many environment-friendly activities. Ministry of environment and forest was established and laws were enacted on environment protection in -1986. The objective of India’s National Environment, policy, here, is worth stating.

  • Conserve and develop a safe, healthy, productive, and aesthetically satisfying environment.
  • Upgrade, develop and manage rural and urban settlements to enhance the quality of life.
  • Plan development on sound ecological principles with environmental impact assessment and incorporating appropriate environmental safeguards.
  • Promote environmental safety technologies, recycling of resources, and utilization of wastes.
  • Conserve the biotic diversity in the country by creating nature reserves and sanctuaries for specific habitats such as mountains, rain forests, pastures, deserts, wetlands, lakes, beaches, mangroves, estuaries, lagoons, and islands.
  • Safeguard the environment within the national maritime Exclusive Economic Zone.
  • Evolve environmental norms and establish effective mechanisms for monitoring surveillance and collection and dissemination of information.
  • Preserve science landscapes, as well as historic and cultural monuments and their environs.
  • Promote environmental education at all levels and create public awareness.
  • Encourage research in environmental science and technological and social investigation to conserve and improve the environment.
  • Develop adequate manpower within the country, of ecologists, environmental scientists, planners, and managers of the highest- quality and recognize their work as an important component of national development.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Short Answer Questions

Odisha State Board CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Solutions Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Short Answer Questions.

CHSE Odisha 12th Class Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Short Answer Questions

Short Questions With Answers

Question 1.
What is security?
Answer:
The concept of security in general refers to freedom from the risk of loss or damage to a thing that is important to survival and well-being. It can have both broad and narrow application, and it can apply to a limited set of objects to be secured, or to a deeper array of interconnected elements in a social system. In its shallowest and narrowest form, which is also its most influential and widespread interpretation, security refers to the security of the nation-state from attack from armed forces.

Question 2.
Define National security.
Answer:
Richard Ullman (1983), for example, has defined a national security threat as anything that can quickly degrade the quality of life of the inhabitants of a state, or that narrows the choices available to people and organizations within the state.

Question 3.
What is securitization?
Answer:
Indeed, because security is a “speech act” that raises the profile of a problem to be of paramount importance to whoever constructs the discourse, broadening the range of security risks without explicitly identifying a referent object that is not the state most often operationalizes state monopolization of responses to meet the new security challenges. This is what is implied in the idea of “securitization”.

Question 4.
What is “Global”?
Answer:
The scale of consumption and pollution in modem, high-energy societies has caused large decreases in primary forest cover; biodiversity losses; depletion of fish stocks; land degradation; water pollution and scarcity; coastal and marine degradation; the contamination of people, plants and animals by chemicals and radioactive substances; and climate change and sea-level rise. These environmental changes are “global” because they are ubiquitous and because some pollutants such as greenhouse gases and radioactive wastes have global consequences.

Question 5.
Define human security.
Answer:
Human security is the combination of threats associated with war, genocide, and the displacement of populations. At a minimum, human security means freedom from violence and from the fear of violence.

Question 6.
Define corporative security.
Answer:
Corporate security is the involvement of international corporation depending on the nature of threat and the willingness and ability of countries to respond.

Question 7.
Mention any two human rights in poltical field.
Answer:
One is freedom of speech and expression and second is freedom to assemble in peaceful maimer.

Question 8.
Which is the greatest danger to security as per traditional notion of secuirity?
Answer:
It is from military threats which lies in another country to endanger the core value of sovereignty independence and territoirial integration of country.

Question 9.
What is meant by disarmament?
Answer:
Disarmament bound state to give up certain kinds weapon to avoid mass destruction through signing various treaties.

Question 10.
What is global poverty?
Answer:
Global poverty signifies a condition available in the state to suffer from low income and less economic growth that is developing or underdeveloped countries.

Question 11.
Is the notion of security applicable to all the state.
Answer:
All states do not experience the same threat at a time hence security is groued into two as per requirements. Traditional and non-traditional conception.

Question 12.
Suggest any one effective step which would limit war and violence between countries.
Answer:
An effective step may be in the form of cooperative security only that involves international corporation which may be bilateral, regional, continental or global which depends upon the nature of threats and the willingness and ability of countries to respond to limit war or violence corporative security place at national and international levels.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Short Answer Questions

Question 13.
Highlight any two threats of country’s security as per traditional notion of security or explain traditional concept of security.
Answer:
Traditional notion of security covers both internal and external threats of country’s security. External threats consist of four components that is military threats, threat of war, balance of power and alliance building. Internal threats include maintenance of internal peace and order and recognise corporative security to limit violence.

Question 14.
What is military threats?
Answer:
Military threats refers to military action from another country to endanger the core value of country’s sovereignty, independence and territorial integrity. Military action often targets men and women that is ordinary citizens.

Question 15.
Explain non-traditional concept of security.
Answer:
Non-traditional concept of security includes human an4 global security covering a wide range of threats affecting human existence.
(1) It does not covers the state only but also the individual and community.
(2) It emphasize on security on nature of threats and right approach to deal with threat.

Question 16.
Write a note on Arms control.
Answer:
Arms control regulates the acquisition or development of weapons by adopting following measures:

  • The Anti Ballistic Missiles Treaty in 1992 stopped the US and Soviet Union from using ballistic missiles to limit large scale production.
  • Other arms control treaties were also signed i.e. Strategic Arms Reduction Treaty (START), Strategic Arms Limitation Treaty and Nuclear non-proliferation Treaty (NPT) to limit the weapons which may bring large scale destruction.
  • NPT regulated the acquisition of nuclear weapons in 1968.
  • NPT did not abolish nuclear weapons rather it limited number of countries that could have them.

Question 17.
What is global security?
Answer:
Defining global security In an address in 1993 I defined “global security” as the absence of threats to the vital interests of the planet, and I argued that this new concept should replace that of “national security.” Furthermore, the idea of security must extend well beyond its traditional military dimension to encompass the interrelated military, political, economic, environmental, health and other threats I list above. Now is an opportune time to build global consensus on these issues and the logical party to take the initiative would clearly be a revitalized UN. International cooperation will become increasingly important in achieving our shared global security goals. We will need new theories and analytic frameworks for global security to replace traditional theories such as containment, balance of power, deterrence, and hegemonic stability.

Question 18.
What is Human security?
Answer:
Defining human security “Human security” will be defined here as the absence of threats to the vital interests of individual people on a worldwide basis. In the words of the UN Development Programme, which originated the concept, human security is “freedom from pervasive threats to people’s rights, safety or lives,” involving both “safety for people from violent threats, such as organized conflict, gross violations of human rights, terrorism and violent crime” and “safety from non-violent threats, such as environmental degradation, economic crises, illicit drugs, infectious diseases and natural disasters.” These two concepts of security, global security and human security, are not inconsistent; rather, they are both complementary and mutually reinforcing.

Question 19.
What are the main features of Human Security?
Answer:
Human security brings together the ‘human elements of security, rights and development. As such, it is an inter-disciplinary concept that displays the following characteristics: people-centered multi-sectoral comprehensive context-specific prevention-oriented As a people-centered concept, human security places the individual at the ‘centre of analysis. ’

Consequently, it considers a broad range of conditions which threaten survival, livelihood and dignity, and identifies the threshold below which human life is intolerably threatened. Human security is also based on a multi-sectoral understanding of insecurities.

Therefore, human security entails a broadened understanding of threats and includes causes of insecurity relating for instance to economic, food,health, environmental, personal, community and political security.

Question 20.
Explain the concept of environmental degradation.
Answer:
Environment constitutes a. very important part of our life. To understand life without studying the impact of environment is simply impossible. The need to protect environment can be ignored only at our peril. We use environmental resources in our day to day life. These resources are renewabteand non-renewable. We have to be more cautious in consuming non-renewable resources like coal and petroleum, which are prone to depletion.

All human activities have an impact on environment. But in the last two centuries or so, the human influence on environment has increased manifold due to the rapid population, growth and the fast development in science and technology. These two are the major factors in reducing the quality of environment and causing its degradation. The environmental degradation poses a great danger to man’s own survival.

It should be realized, sooner than later, that conservation and improvement ofthe environment are vital for the survival, and well being of mankind. Natural resources of land, air and water have to be used wisely as a trust to ensure a healthy environment for the present and future generations.

Question 21.
Write about awareness about environment problem.
Answer:
In the past two decades, environment has attracted the attention of decision makers, scientists and even laymen in many parts of the world. They are becoming increasingly, conscious of issues such as famines, droughts, floods, scarcity of fuel, firewood and fodder, pollution of air and, water, problems of hazardous chemicals and radiation, depletion of natural resources, extinction of wildlife and dangers to flora and fauna.

People are now aware of the need to protect the natural environmental resources of air, water, soil and plant life that constitute the natural capital on which man depends. The environmental issues are important because the absence of their solutions is more horrible. Unless environmental issues are not solved or not taken care of the coming generations may find earth worth not living. The need of the planet and the needs of the person have become one.

There is no denying the fact that environment has to be protected and conserved so to make future life possible. Indeed, man’s needs are increasing and accordingly, the environment is also being altered, indeed, nature’s capacity is too accommodating and too regenerative yet there is a limit to nature’s capacity, especially when pressure of exploding population and technology keep mounting. What is required is the sustenance, conservation and improvement of the changing and fragile environment.

Question 22.
Which third weapon both the superpowers did not want to give up under the concept of disarmament?
Answer:
Disarmament requires all states to give up certain kinds of weapons i.e. the 1972 Biological Weapons Convention (BWC) and 1992 Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC) banned the production and possession of these weapons. Despite the US and Soviet Union were not ready to give up the third type of weapons of mass destruction namely nuclear weapons.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Short Answer Questions

Question 23.
“The secure states do not imply the secure people in itself”. Examine the statement.
Answer:
The secure states are supposed to protect their people from an individual in security also rather the territorial security only. Hence they are required to provide security from foreign attacks hunger, diseases and natural disasters, etc. because it destructs the people rather than war.

Question 24.
How is global poverty a source of insecurity? Explain.
Answer:
Global poverty refers to low economic growth, low national income, and low standard of living of developing or least developed countries. It is a source of insecurity because:

  • Half the world’s population growth occurs in just six countries- India, China, Pakistan, Nigeria, Bangladesh, and Indonesia, considered developing countries, and even in the poorest countries population is expected to triple in the next 50 years.
  • Globally, this disparity contributes to the gap between the northern and southern countries of the world.
  • Poverty in the south has also led to a large migration to seek better economic opportunities in the north.
  • All these created international political fiction as international law and norms make a distinction between migrants and refugees as they do not get ready to accept migrants.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Objective Questions

Odisha State Board CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Solutions Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Objective Questions and Answers.

CHSE Odisha 12th Class Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Objective Questions

Multiple Choice Questions With Answers

Question 1.
Propnens of narrow concept of human security focus on?
(a) Violent threats to individual.
(b) Violent threat to country
(c) Violent threat
(d) None
Answer:
(a) Violent threats to individual.

Question 2.
Strategic Arms limitation Treaty was signed by?
(a) Brezne
(b) W.Carter
(c) Brezhnev and Jimmy Carter
(d) None
Answer:
(c) Brezhnev and Jimmy Carter

Question 3.
The art of reducing,limiting or abolishing weapn was termed as?
(a) Disbarment
(b) Armcontrol
(c) Armrace
(d) Unarm
Answer:
(a) Disbarment

True or False

1. Coal is a renewable resource.
Answer: False

2. The fast development in science and technology is a major factor contributing to the environmental degradation.
Answer: True

3. The growing population in India does not contribute to the environmental degradation.
Answer: False

4. Trees are a good example of non-renewable resource.
Answer: False

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 5 Issues in International Politics Objective Questions

Passage Based Questions With Answers

Passage 1.
Read the following passage carefully and answer the questions:
The US and Soviet Union signed a number of other arms control treaties including the strategic Arms Limitations Treaty II (SALT II) and the Strategic Arms Reduction Treaty (START). The Nuclear Non-proliferation Treaty (NPT) of 1968 was an arms control treaty in the sense that it regulated the acquisition of nuclear weapons, those countries that had tested and manufactured nuclear weapons before 1967 were allowed to keep their weapons and those that had not done so were to give up the right to acquire them. The NPT did not abolish nuclear weapons; rather; it limited the number of countries that could have them.

Question 1.
What is arms control treaty?
Answer:
To regulate the acquisition or development of weapons among countries.

Question 2.
Was NPT an arms control treaty? Why?
Answer:
Yes, because it regulated the acquisition of nuclear weapons to protect world from large seat destruction.

Question 3.
What was the intention behind regulation of NPT?
Answer:
It did not abolish nuclear weapons rather it limited the number of countries that could have them.

Passage 2.
Read the following passage carefully and answer the questions:
Global poverty is another source of insecurity. The world population- now at 650 crores will reach 700 to 800 crore within 25 years and many eventually level out of 900 to 1000 crore. Currently, half the world’s population growth occurs in just six countries – India, China, Pakistan, Nigeria, Bangladesh, and Indonesia. Among the world’s poorest countries, the population is expected to triple in the next 50 years whereas many rich countries will see population shrinkage in that period, high per capita income and low population growth make rich states or rich social groups get richer, whereas low incomes and high population growth reinforce each other to make poor states and poor groups get poorer.

Question 1.
Name the countries expected to occur half the world’s population growth.
Answer:
India, China, Pakistan, Nigeria, Bangladesh, and Indonesia.

Question 2.
Mention two reasons to make rich states higher.
Answer:
(i) High per capita income
(ii) Low population growth.

Question 3.
What makes poor countries poorer?
Answer:
Low income and high population growth.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Economics Chapter 15 Long Answer Questions in Odia Medium

Odisha State Board CHSE Odisha Class 12 Economics Solutions Chapter 15 ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ Long Answer Questions.

CHSE Odisha 12th Class Economics Chapter 15 Long Answer Questions in Odia Medium

ଦୀର୍ଘ ଉତ୍ତରମୂଳକ ପ୍ରଶ୍ନୋତ୍ତର

1. ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର କାର୍ଯ୍ୟାବଳୀ ବର୍ଣ୍ଣନା କର ।
Answer:
ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ୍ ଏକ ଋଣ ପ୍ରଦାନକାରୀ ସଂସ୍ଥା । ଏହା ସ୍ୱଳ୍ପକାଳୀନ ଋଣ କାରବାର କରିଥାଏ । ଏହା ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣଙ୍କର ଉଦ୍‌ବୃତ୍ତ ଅର୍ଥ ସଂଗ୍ରହ କରି ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ଓ ଔଦ୍ୟୋଗିକ ବ୍ୟବସାୟ ପ୍ରତିଷ୍ଠାନଗୁଡ଼ିକର ଅସ୍ଥାୟୀ ଆବଶ୍ୟକତାର ବିତ୍ତୀୟନ କରିଥାଏ । ଏହା ଏକ ଲାଭ ଅର୍ଜନକାରୀ ସଂସ୍ଥା ହୋଇଥିବାରୁ ସାଧାରଣ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କାରବାର କରି ତଥା ଅନ୍ୟ କେତେକ ବିବିଧ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରି ଏହା ଲାଭ ଅର୍ଜନ କରିଥାଏ । ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଚାରିଗୋଟି ପ୍ରଧାନ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ ରହିଛି ।

ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକ ହେଲା – ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣଙ୍କଠାରୁ ଜମା ଗ୍ରହଣ, ଋଣ ପ୍ରଦାନ, ଋଣମୁଦ୍ରା କାରବାର ଓ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି ।

(i) ଜମା ଗ୍ରହଣ – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଗୋଟିଏ ଗୁରୁତ୍ବପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ ହେଲା ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣଙ୍କଠାରୁ ଜମା ଗ୍ରହଣ କରିବା । ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଜମାର ନିରାପତ୍ତା ଓ ଜମା ଉପରେ ଦିଆଯାଉଥିବା ସୁଧ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରେ ଜମା ରଖୁବାକୁ ପ୍ରରୋଚିତ କରିଥାଏ । ଜମା ବିଭିନ୍ନ ପ୍ରକାରର; ଯଥା – ଚାହିଦା ଜମା ବା ଚଳନ୍ତି ଜମା (Demand deposit or Current deposit), (Savings deposit) & all (Fixed or Time deposit) ।

ଚାହିଦା ଜମା ବା ଚଳନ୍ତି ଜମା ହାତରେ ରଖୁଥିବା ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଙ୍ଗେ ସମାନ । ଜମାକାରୀ ପୂର୍ବରୁ କୌଣସି ନୋଟିସ୍ ନ ଦେଇ ଯେକୌଣସି କାର୍ଯ୍ୟକାରୀ ଦିନରେ ଏହି ହିସାବରୁ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଉଠାଇପାରିବ । ଏହିଭଳି ଜମାକୁ ଅନ୍ୟ କୌଣସିଠାରେ ଲାଭଜନକଭାବେ ବିନିଯୋଗ କରାଯାଇ ନ ଥାଏ । କାରଣ ଚାହିଁବାମାତ୍ରେ ଜମାକାରୀଙ୍କୁ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଦେଇଦେବାପାଇଁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସବୁବେଳେ ଏହାକୁ ନିଜ ପାଖରେ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଆକାରରେ ରଖୁଥାଏ ।

ତେଣୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସାଧାରଣତଃ ଏହି ଜମା ଉପରେ ଅତି ସାମାନ୍ୟ ସୁଧ ଦେଇଥାଏ ବା ଆଦୌ କୌଣସି ସୁଧ ଦେଇ ନଥାଏ । ଯଦି ଏହି ଜମା ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ସର୍ବନିମ୍ନ ପରିମାଣରୁ କମ୍ ହୋଇଥାଏ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନିଜର କମିଶନ ଆକାରରେ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କଠାରୁ ସାମାନ୍ୟ କିଛି ଆଦାୟ କରିଥାଏ । ଚେଦ୍ଵାରା ଏହି ହିସାବରେ ପ୍ରଚଳନ କରାଯାଇଥାଏ ।

ମିଆଦି ଜମା ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଧାରିତ ସମୟକାଳ ପାଇଁ କରାଯାଇଥାଏ । ଏହି ନିର୍ଦ୍ଧାରିତ ସମୟସୀମା ଅବ୍ୟବହିତ ହେବା ପୂର୍ବରୁ ଏହାକୁ ଉଠାଯାଇ ପାରିବ ନାହିଁ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏହି ଜମାକୁ କେତେକ ଲାଭଜନକ ଉଦ୍ୟୋଗରେ ବିନିଯୋଗ କରି କିଛି ଲାଭ ଅର୍ଜନ କରିଥାଏ । ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ହିସାବ ଉପରେ ମିଳୁଥିବା ସୁଧହାର ଅପେକ୍ଷା ଏହି ହିସାବ ଉପରେ ମିଳୁଥିବା ସୁଧହାର ଅଧିକ । ସମୟକାଳ ଯେତିକି ଦୀର୍ଘତର ହୋଇଥାଏ ସୁଧହାର ସେତିକି ଅଧ‌ିକ ହୋଇଥାଏ ।

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Economics Chapter 15 Long Answer Questions in Odia Medium

ସଞ୍ଚୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଜମାରୁ ଚାହିଁବାମାତ୍ରେ ଟଙ୍କା ଉଠାଇ ଅଣାଯାଇ ପାରିବ; କିନ୍ତୁ ଗୋଟିଏ ସପ୍ତାହରେ ସୀମିତ ଦିନରେ; କୁହାଯାଉ ସପ୍ତାହକୁ ଦିନେ ବା ଦୁଇଦିନ ଏହି ଉଠାଣ କରାଯାଇପାରିବ । କେତେକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସପ୍ତାହକୁ ଦିନେ ଓ ଆଉ କେତେକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସପ୍ତାହକୁ ଦୁଇଦିନ ଉଠାଣ ପାଇଁ ଅନୁମତି ଦେଇଥା’ନ୍ତି । ପୁଣି ଯଦି ବଡ଼ ପରିମାଣର ଉଠାଣ ଥାଏ ତାହାହେଲେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ପୂର୍ବରୁ ନୋଟିସ୍ ଦେବା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ହୋଇପାରେ । ଏହି ହିସାବ ଉପରେ ଏକ ପରିମିତ ସୁଧହାର ଦିଆଯାଇଥାଏ ଏବଂ ଏହା କ୍ଷୁଦ୍ର ସଞ୍ଚୟକୁ ଉତ୍ସାହିତ କରିଥାଏ ।

(ii) ଋଣ ପ୍ରଦାନ – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଦ୍ୱିତୀୟ ପ୍ରଧାନ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ ହେଲା, ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣରୁ ଜମା ଆକାରରେ ପାଉଥିବା ଅର୍ଥରୁ ଋଣ ଓ ଅଗ୍ରିମ ଋଣ ଦେବା । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନିଜର ଅଭିଜ୍ଞତାରୁ ଜାଣେ ଯେ, ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣଙ୍କଠାରୁ ମିଳିଥିବା ମୋଟ ଜମାର କେବଳ ଗୋଟିଏ କ୍ଷୁଦ୍ର ଅଂଶ ନିଜ ପାଖରେ ସଞ୍ଚିତ ଆକାରରେ ରଖୁଲେ ନଗଦୀ ପାଇଁ ହେଉଥିବା ସମସ୍ତ ଚାହିଦା ସେ ପୂରଣ କରିପାରିବ ।

ତେଣୁ ସେ ଜମାର ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ଶତାଂଶକୁ ନିଜର ନଗଦ ସଞ୍ଚ ଆକାରରେ ରଖୁଥାଏ ଏବଂ ବାକିତକ ଲାଭ ଉପାର୍ଜନ ପାଇଁ ସରକାରୀ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତିରେ ହେଉ ବା ଅନ୍ୟ କୌଣସି ଲାଭଜନକ ସଂସ୍ଥାରେ ହେଉ ବିନିଯୋଗ କରିଥାଏ । ଏହା ବ୍ୟବସାୟୀ ଓ ବେପାରୀମାନଙ୍କୁ ମଧ୍ୟ ଅଗ୍ରୀମ ଋଣ ଦେଇପାରେ । ଋଣଦାନ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଆୟର ଅନ୍ୟତମ ମୂଳ ଉତ୍ସ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନିମ୍ନୋକ୍ତ ଉପାୟରେ ଋଣ ଦେଇଥାଏ ।

(a) ଋଣ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା – ଏହା ଏକ ସରଳ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା । ଏହାକୁ ମଧ୍ୟ ସ୍ପଷ୍ଟ ଅଗ୍ରୀମ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା (clean advance system) କୁହାଯାଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କେତେକ ସାପାର୍ଶିକ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି (collateral securities) ଦେଇଥାଏ । ଋଣ ଗ୍ରହଣକାରୀ ଅନୁମୋଦିତ ଋଣମୁଦ୍ରା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରୁ ଉଠାଇ ଆଣି ନିଜ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟରେ ଲଗାଇ ପାରନ୍ତି କିମ୍ବା ଏହି ଋଣକୁ ଋଣଗ୍ରହୀତାର ହିସାବରେ ଜମା ଦିଆଯାଇଥାଏ ଏବଂ ସେ ନିଜର ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ସମୟରେ ଚେକ୍ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ତା’ର ହିସାବରୁ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଉଠାଇଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

ଏହି ଧରଣର ଋଣ ଦିଆଗଲାବେଳେ ଋଣଗ୍ରହୀତାର ପରିଶୋଧ କ୍ଷମତା ଓ ସାଧୁତା ପ୍ରତି ବିଶେଷ ଦୃଷ୍ଟି ଦିଆଯାଇଥାଏ । ତେଣୁ ଏହି ଉଦ୍ଦେଶ୍ୟରେ ବ୍ୟକ୍ତିଗତ ପ୍ରତିଶ୍ରୁତି, ଅଙ୍ଗୀକାର ବା ପ୍ରତିଭୂତିକୁ ଯଥେଷ୍ଟ ବୋଲି ବିଚାର କରାଯାଇଥାଏ ।

(b) ଓଭର ଡ୍ରାଫ୍‌ଟ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା – ଓଭର ଡ୍ରାଫ୍‌ଟ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ଗୋଟିଏ ପ୍ରକାର ବିଶେଷ ସୁବିଧା । ଏହି ସୁବିଧା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ତା’ର ଜମାକାରୀମାନଙ୍କୁ ଦେଇଥାଏ । ଏହି ସୁବିଧା ଦିଆଗଲେ ଜମାକାରୀମାନେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ପାଖରେ ରଖିଥିବା ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଜମା ପରିମାଣ ଅପେକ୍ଷା ସେମାନଙ୍କ ହିସାବରୁ ଅଧିକ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଉଠାଣର ସୁବିଧା ପାଇଥା’ନ୍ତି । ଏହାର ଅର୍ଥ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ପାଖେ ଥିବା ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଜମା ପରିମାଣ ବାହାରେ ଓଭର ଡ୍ରାଫ୍‌ଟ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥାରେ ଦର୍ଶାଯାଇଥିବା ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ସୀମା ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ଚେକ୍ କାଟିବାକୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏହାର କେତେକ ଗ୍ରାହକଙ୍କୁ ଅନୁମତି ଦେଇଥାଏ ।

ଅନୁମତିପ୍ରାପ୍ତ ଅତିରିକ୍ତ ଉଠାଣ ପରିମାଣ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କୁ ଦିଆଯାଇଥିବା ଏକ ବ୍ୟକ୍ତିଗତ ଋଣ ବୋଲି ଧରିନିଆଯାଇଥାଏ ଏବଂ ସେମାନେ ଏହା ଉପରେ ସୁଧ ଦେଇଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

(c) ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଋଣ – ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣଗ୍ରହୀତାଙ୍କ ବଚନପତ୍ର ଉପରେ ସେମାନଙ୍କୁ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରାର ଋଣ (Cash Credit) ଦେଇଥାଏ । ଏହି ବଚନପତ୍ରରେ ଅନ୍ତତଃ ଦୁଇଜଣ ଜାମିନ୍ଦାର ଗ୍ୟାରେଣ୍ଟି ଦେଇଥା’ନ୍ତି ଏବଂ ଅନେକ ସମୟରେ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି ବା ବିଭିନ୍ନ ଦ୍ରବ୍ୟକୁ ଅଙ୍ଗୀକାରରୂପେ ବନ୍ଧକ ଦିଆଯାଇଥାଏ । ଋଣ ମଞ୍ଜୁର କରାଯାଇ ଋଣଗ୍ରହୀତାଙ୍କ ନାମରେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରେ ଗୋଟିଏ ହିସାବ ଖୋଲାଯାଏ ଏବଂ ଅନୁମତିପ୍ରାପ୍ତ ଋଣ ସୀମାକୁ ଅତିକ୍ରମ ନ କରି ବେଳକୁ ବେଳ ତା’ର ଆବଶ୍ୟକତା ଅନୁସାରେ ସେଥୁରୁ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଉଠାଣ କରିବାକୁ ତାକୁ କୁହାଯାଏ ।

ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଯେତେବେଳେ ଚାହିଁବ ଏହି ସୁବିଧାକୁ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟାହାର କରି ନେଇଯାଇପାରିବ ବା ଋଣ ସୀମାକୁ ହ୍ରାସ କରିଦେଇପାରିବ । ଋଣଗ୍ରହୀତା ପ୍ରକୃତରେ ଉଠାଇ ସାରିଥିବା ପରିମାଣର ମୁଦ୍ରା ଉପରେ ସୁଧ ଦେଇଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

(d) ବିନିମୟ ପତ୍ର ଅପହାର କରିବା ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଦେଶ ଭିତରେ ଏବଂ ବିଭିନ୍ନ ଦେଶ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଦ୍ରବ୍ୟଗୁଡ଼ିକର ଚଳନର ବିତ୍ତୀୟନ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ବିନିମୟ ପତ୍ର ଅପହାର କରିବା ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା (Discounting bills of exchange) ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଏହା କରାଯାଇଥାଏ ।

ଆଧୁନିକ ବ୍ୟବସାୟ ଅନେକାଂଶରେ ଋଣ କାରବାର ଉପରେ ନିର୍ଭର କରିଥାଏ । ବିନିମୟ ପତ୍ର ଏକ ବ୍ୟବସାୟ ଋଣର ସ୍ବୀକୃତିପତ୍ର ହୋଇଥାଏ । ବିଲ୍‌ଧାରକଙ୍କୁ ବିଲ୍‌ ପରିଣତ ଅବସ୍ଥାକୁ ଆସିବା ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ଅପେକ୍ଷା କରିବାକୁ ପଡ଼ିଥାଏ । କିନ୍ତୁ ସେ ଯଦି ସଙ୍ଗେ ସଙ୍ଗେ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ କରୁଥା’ନ୍ତି, ତାହାହେଲେ ସେ ଗୋଟିଏ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ୍‌କୁ ଏହି ବିଲ୍‌କୁ ଭଙ୍ଗାଇବାପାଇଁ ଅନୁରୋଧ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଅପହାର ସୂତ୍ରରେ ଏହି ବିଲ୍‌କୁ କିଣିନେଇଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

ବିନିମୟ ପତ୍ର ଅପହାର ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥାଦ୍ୱାରା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ ଓ ବୈଦେଶିକ ବ୍ୟାପାରର ବିତ୍ତୀୟନ କରିଥାଏ । ପୁଣି ଏହି ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣ ଦେବାର ଅନ୍ୟ ଏକ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା । ପ୍ରକୃତରେ ଯେଉଁ ବ୍ୟକ୍ତିଙ୍କ ନାମରେ ବିଲ୍‌ କଟାଯାଇଥାଏ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ତାଙ୍କୁ ଗୋଟିଏ ଋଣ ଦେଇଥାଏ ଏବଂ ମିଆଦ ପୂରିଗଲେ ତାଙ୍କଠାରୁ ସୁଧ ସହ ଏହାକୁ ଅସୁଲ କରିଥାଏ । ତେଣୁ ଅପହାର ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ଏକ ଋଣଦାନ ପଦ୍ଧତି । ଏହା ଉଭୟ ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ ଓ ଆନ୍ତର୍ଜାତିକ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟର ବିତ୍ତୀୟନ କରିଥାଏ ।

(iii) ଅର୍ଥନୈତିକ ବିକାଶ – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଦେଶର ଅର୍ଥନୈତିକ ବିକାଶରେ ଗୁରୁତ୍ବପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ ଭୂମିକା ଗ୍ରହଣ କରିଥାଏ । ଅଷ୍ଟାଦଶ ଓ ଉନବିଂଶ ଶତାବ୍ଦୀରେ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଜନ୍ମ ବିନା ଇଂଲଣ୍ଡରେ ଶିଳ୍ପବିପ୍ଳବ ସଫଳ ହୋଇପାରି ନଥା’ନ୍ତା । ବଳିଷ୍ଠ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କାରବାରର ବିକାଶବିନା ବିକାଶଶୀଳ ଦେଶମାନେ ଅର୍ଥନୈତିକ ବିକାଶ ପାଇଁ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଉଦ୍ୟମକୁ ତ୍ବରାନ୍ବିତ କରିପାରିବେ ନାହିଁ । ଭାରତର ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଗ୍ରାମାଞ୍ଚଳ ବିକାଶ ଦାୟିତ୍ୱ ଦିଆଯାଇଛି ।

କେତେକ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଅଗ୍ରଣୀ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ବିଭିନ୍ନ ଜିଲ୍ଲାକୁ ପୋଷ୍ୟ ଜିଲ୍ଲାରୂପେ ଗ୍ରହଣ କରିନେଇଛନ୍ତି ଏବଂ ସେହି ଜିଲ୍ଲାଗୁଡ଼ିକର ଗ୍ରାମାଞ୍ଚଳର ସର୍ବବିଧ ବିକାଶ ପାଇଁ ପଦକ୍ଷେପମାନ ନେଉଛନ୍ତି । ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଏବେ ଅଧ୍ଵକଭାବେ ବିକାଶମୂଳକ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟକଳାପ ସହିତ ସଂପୃକ୍ତ ।

(iv) ଏଜେଣ୍ଟରୂପେ ସେବାଦାନ – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଗୁଡ଼ିକ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କର ଏଜେଣ୍ଟରୂପେ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ତରଫରୁ ଅନେକ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ସେମାନେ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କ ତରଫରୁ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି କ୍ରୟ -ବିକ୍ରୟ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି, ଲାଭାଂଶ ଓ ସୁଧ ଅସୁଲ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି ଏବଂ ସେମାନଙ୍କପାଇଁ ନ୍ୟାସଧାରୀ (trustee), ତତ୍ତ୍ୱାବଧାରକ (executor) ଓ ଅନୁମୋଦିତ ପ୍ରତିନିଧ (attorney) ଭାବେ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Economics Chapter 15 Long Answer Questions in Odia Medium

ଚେକ୍, ବିଲ୍, ଦେୟ ଓ ବୀମା କିସ୍ତି ଆଦି ଆଦାୟ କରିବାରେ ଓ ଦେବାରେ ସେମାନେ ମଧ୍ୟ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କର ଏଜେଣ୍ଟରୂପେ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ମୂଲ୍ୟବାନ୍ ଜିନିଷ ଓ ଗୁରୁତ୍ଵପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ ଦଲିଲକୁ ନିରାପଦରେ ରଖୁବାର ସୁବିଧା ମଧ୍ୟ ସେମାନେ ଯୋଗାଇ ଦେଇଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

(v) ମୁଦ୍ରା ଅନ୍ତରଣ – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଡ୍ରାଫ୍‌ଟ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଗୋଟିଏ ସ୍ଥାନରୁ ଅନ୍ୟ ଏକ ସ୍ଥାନକୁ ମୁଦ୍ରା ପ୍ରେରଣ କରିବାରେ ସାହାଯ୍ୟ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ଗୋଟିଏ ସ୍ଥାନରୁ ଅନ୍ୟ ଏକ ସ୍ଥାନକୁ ମୁଦ୍ରା ପ୍ରେରଣ କରିବାର ଏହା ସବୁଠାରୁ ଶସ୍ତା ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ।

(vi) ମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି – ଅଧୁନାତନ ବିଶ୍ବରେ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଗୁଡ଼ିକର ସବୁଠାରୁ ଗୁରୁତ୍ଵପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ ହେଲା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଜମା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା । ଉନ୍ନତ ଦେଶମାନଙ୍କରେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମୁଦ୍ରା ହିଁ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଯୋଗାଣର ବଡ଼ ଅଂଶ ହୋଇଥ୍‌ବାର ଦେଖାଯାଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଗୋଟିଏ ଋଣ ମଞ୍ଜୁର କଲାବେଳେ ଋଣଗ୍ରହୀତାଙ୍କ ନାମରେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରେ ଗୋଟିଏ ଜମା ହିସାବ ଖୋଲିଦେଇଥାଏ ଏବଂ ଏହି ହିସାବ ଉପରେ ଚେକ୍ କାଟି ମୁଦ୍ରା ଉଠାଣ କରିବାକୁ ଅନୁମତି ଦେଇଥାଏ ।

ଋଣଗ୍ରହୀତା ଚେକ୍ ଦେଇଚାଲେ । ଏହି ଚେକ୍‌ଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଭଙ୍ଗାଣ ପାଇଁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ୍‌କୁ ଆସିବା ପୂର୍ବରୁ ଅନେକ ହାତଦେଇ ଗତି କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ଚେକ୍‌ଗୁଡ଼ିକର ପ୍ରଚଳନ ବିସ୍ତୃତି ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକ ବିନିମୟ ମାଧ୍ୟମ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ଏହାହିଁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମୁଦ୍ରା ।

2. ଗୋଟିଏ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଦେଣା -ପାଉଣା ସନ୍ତୁଳନ ଫର୍ଦ ପ୍ରସ୍ତୁତ କରି ଉଭୟ ପାଖରେ ଥିବା ବିଷୟଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ବୁଝାଅ ।
Answer:
ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସନ୍ତୁଳନ ଫର୍ଦ୍ଦ ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ସମୟପାଇଁ ଏହାର ଦେଣା – ପାଉଣାର ଏକ ବିବରଣୀ ମାତ୍ର । ଏହା ସେହି ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ସମୟ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ବିତ୍ତୀୟ ଅବସ୍ଥାର ସୂଚନା ଦେଇଥାଏ ଏବଂ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କିପରି ଅର୍ଥ ସଂଗ୍ରହ କରିଛି ଓ କେଉଁ ଉପାୟରେ ଏହାର ବିନିଯୋଗ କରିଛି ତାହା ଦର୍ଶାଇଥାଏ । ଋଣଗ୍ରହୀତା ହିସାବରେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର କାର୍ଯ୍ୟକଳାପ ସନ୍ତୁଳନ ଫର୍ଦ୍ଦର ଦେୟତା ପାଖେ ଦର୍ଶାଯାଇଥାଏ । ପାଉଣା ପାଖ ବା ପରିସମ୍ପତ୍ତି ପାଖ ହେଲା ଋଣଦେବା ପାଖ ଏବଂ ପରିସମ୍ପରି ବା ପାଉଣା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସମ୍ପଦର ସୂଚନା ଦେଇଥାଏ ।

ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସନ୍ତୁଳନ ଫର୍ଦ ସାଧାରଣତଃ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ଆର୍ଥିକ ବର୍ଷ ଶେଷରେ ପ୍ରସ୍ତୁତ କରାଯାଇଥାଏ । ଏହା ଏକ ଦର୍ପଣ ସଦୃଶ । ଏଥିରେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସାଧାରଣ ସ୍ୱାସ୍ଥ୍ୟ ଅବସ୍ଥା ଓ ବ୍ୟବସାୟ କାରବାର ପ୍ରତିଫଳନ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ଏହି ବାର୍ଷିକ ଆର୍ଥକ ବିବରଣୀରୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଆର୍ଥିକ ସ୍ଥିତି ବା ଋଣ ପରିଶୋଧ କ୍ଷମତା ଏବଂ ନଗଦୀ ଅବସ୍ଥା ନିରୂପଣ କରାଯାଇପାରିବ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସମଗ୍ର ବ୍ୟବସାୟ ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣଙ୍କ ଆସ୍ଥା ଉପରେ ପ୍ରତିଷ୍ଠିତ ।

ଯଦି ସନ୍ତୁଳନ ଫର୍ଦ୍ଦ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସୁଦୃଢ଼ ଆର୍ଥିକ ସ୍ଥିତିର ପ୍ରତିଫଳନ କରେ, ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଉପରେ ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣଙ୍କ ଆସ୍ଥା ବୃଦ୍ଧିପାଏ; କିନ୍ତୁ ଏହାର ଯଦି କୌଣସି ସନ୍ତୋଷଜନକ ଆର୍ଥିକ ସ୍ଥିତିର ସୂଚନା ନ ଦିଏ, ତେବେ ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଉପରୁ କ୍ରମେ ଆସ୍ଥା ହରାଇବାକୁ ଆରମ୍ଭ କରନ୍ତି । ଶେଷରେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବ୍ୟବସାୟ ଭୁଶୁଡ଼ି ପଡ଼େ । ସମଗ୍ର ସମାଜ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସନ୍ତୁଳନ ଫର୍କରେ ଆଗ୍ରହ ପ୍ରକାଶ କରିଥାଏ । ନିମ୍ନରେ ଗୋଟିଏ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସନ୍ତୁଳନ ଫର୍ଦର ଏକ ନମୁନା ଆଲୋଚନା କରାଗଲା –

ସନ୍ତୁଳନ ଫର୍ଦ୍ଦ

ଦେୟତା ପାଉଣା ବା ପରିସମ୍ପତ୍ତି
1. ପ୍ରଦତ୍ତ ପୁଞ୍ଜି 1. ହାତରେ ଓ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରେ ଥିବା ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା
2. ସଞ୍ଚ୍ତ ନିଧି ଓ ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ସଞ୍ଚ୍ତି 2. ଚାହିଦା ମାତ୍ରେ ଓ ଅଳ୍ପ ସମୟ ନୋଟିସ୍‌ରେ ମିଳୁଥିବା ମୁଦ୍ରା
3. ଜମା ଓ ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ହିସାବ, ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କିଙ୍ଗ୍ କମ୍ପାନୀ ଏଜେଣ୍ଟ ଆଦିଙ୍କଠାରୁ ଋଣ 3. ଅପହ୍ରାସିତ ବିଲ୍
4. ଦେୟଯୋଗ୍ୟ ବିଲ୍ 4. ଆଦାୟ ହେଉଥିବା ଚେକ୍
5. ସ୍ବୀକୃତି ଓ ପୃଷ୍ଠାଙ୍କନ 5. ବିନିଯୋଗ
6. ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ଦେୟତା 6. ଋଣ ଓ ଅଗ୍ରିମ
7. ସ୍ଵୀକୃତି ଓ ପୃଷ୍ଠାଙ୍କନ
8. ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ପାଉଣା

ଦେଣା ବା ଦେୟତା (Liabilities) :
ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଅଂଶ ଉପରେ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଆକାରରେ ବ୍ୟାକୁ ଦେଇଥିବା ପରିମାଣ ଅର୍ଥକୁ ପ୍ରଦତ୍ତ ପୁଞ୍ଜି (Paid – up capital) କୁହାଯାଏ । ତେଣୁ ଏହା ଅଂଶୀଦାରମାନଙ୍କୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଦେଣା ଅଟେ ।

ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ବଣ୍ଟାଯାଇ ନ ଥିବା ଲାଭରୁ ଆରକ୍ଷିତ ନିଧୁ (Reserve fund) ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରାଯାଇଥାଏ । ଭବିଷ୍ୟତ ଦୁର୍ଘଟଣା ଏବଂ ଅଦୃଷ୍ଟପୂର୍ବ କ୍ଷୟକ୍ଷତିର ସମ୍ମୁଖୀନ ହେବାପାଇଁ ବର୍ଷ ପରେ ବର୍ଷ ଲାଭର ଏକ ଅଂଶକୁ ସଞ୍ଚୟ କରି ରଖାଯାଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ତା’ର ଲାଭର ଶତକଡ଼ା 20 ଭାଗ ଆରକ୍ଷିତ ନିସ୍‌ରେ ରଖିବାପାଇଁ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ଭାରତୀୟ ଆଇନରେ ଅଛି । ଆରକ୍ଷିତ ନିଧୁର ସୃଷ୍ଟି ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ପ୍ରତି ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣଙ୍କର ଆସ୍ଥା ଜନ୍ମାଇଥାଏ ।

ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ବଣ୍ଟା ହୋଇ ନଥିବା ଲାଭରୁ ଆରକ୍ଷିତ ନିଧୁର ସୃଷ୍ଟି ହୋଇଥିବାରୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ପ୍ରତି ସର୍ବସାଧାରଣଙ୍କର ଆସ୍ଥା ଜନ୍ମାଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ବଣ୍ଟା ହୋଇ ନଥୁବା ଲାଭରୁ ଆରକ୍ଷିତ ନିସ୍‌ର ସୃଷ୍ଟି ହୋଇଥବାରୁ ଏଥୁରେ ସଞ୍ଚିତ ହୋଇ ରହିଥିବା ଅର୍ଥ ଅଂଶୀଦାରମାନଙ୍କର ଏବଂ ଏହା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଅଂଶୀଦାରଙ୍କ ପ୍ରତି ଏକ ଦେଣା । ଯେକୌଣସି ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ଉଦ୍ଦେଶ୍ୟ ପାଇଁ ଆରକ୍ଷିତ ନିଜ୍ ଭଳି ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ନିଧୁ ରଖାଯାଇପାରେ । ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକ ମଧ୍ୟ ଅଂଶୀଦାରମାନଙ୍କ ପ୍ରତି ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଦେଣାରୁ ସୂଚନା ଦେଇଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

ଜମା ଅର୍ଥ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଏକ ପ୍ରଧାନ ଦେଣା । ଜମା ସାଧାରଣତଃ 3 ପ୍ରକାରର – ଚାହିଦା ଜମା, ସଞ୍ଚୟ ଜମା ଓ ମିଆଦି ଜମା । ଚାହିଦା ଜମା ମୁଦ୍ରା ଅଟେ ଏବଂ ମିଆଦି ଜମା ପ୍ରାୟତଃ ମୁଦ୍ରା, କାରଣ ଏହା ଚାହିଁବା ମାତ୍ରେ ମିଳେ ନହିଁ ଏବଂ ଏହାକୁ ଚେଦ୍ଵାରା ହସ୍ତାନ୍ତର କରାଯାଇ ପାରିନଥାଏ । ବିଭିନ୍ନ ପ୍ରକାର ଜମାରେ ମଧ୍ୟ ଭିନ୍ନ ଭିନ୍ନ ସୁଧହାର ମିଳିଥାଏ । ସାଧାରଣତଃ ଚାହିଦା ଜମା ଉପରେ କୌଣସି ସୁଧ ଦିଆଯାଏ ନାହିଁ । କିନ୍ତୁ ଅନ୍ୟ ଜମା ଉପରେ ମିଳୁଥିବା ସୁଧହାର ଜମାର ସମୟକାଳର ଦୀର୍ଘତା ଅନୁସାରେ ଭିନ୍ନ ଭିନ୍ନ ହୋଇଥାଏ ।

ସ୍ବୀକୃତି ଓ ପୃଷ୍ଠାଙ୍କନ (Acceptances and Endorsements) : ସ୍ବୀକୃତି ଓ ପୃଷ୍ଠାଙ୍କନ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଏକ ଦେଣା । ନିଜ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କ ପକ୍ଷରୁ ବିନିମୟ ପତ୍ର ସ୍ଵୀକାର କରି ଓ ପୃଷ୍ଠାଙ୍କନ କରି ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏହି ଦେୟତା ଗ୍ରହଣ କରିଥାଏ । ଏହାଦ୍ଵାରା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଆକସ୍ମିକ ଦେୟତା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିଥାଏ । ଏହା କରିବାଦ୍ଵାରା ତା’ର ଗ୍ରାହକମାନେ ତା’ର ନାଆଁକୁ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି ଏବଂ ବିଲ୍ଵ ଭଙ୍ଗାଇବା ଦିନ ଆସିଗଲେ ସେମାନେ ବିଲ୍ ଭଙ୍ଗାଇଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

ତେଣୁ ଏହି ବିଷୟଟି ସନ୍ତୁଳନ ଫର୍ଦରେ ଉଭୟ ଦେଣା ଓ ପାଉଣା ପାଖରେ ଦେଖାଯାଇଥାଏ । ଯଦି ବିଲ୍‌ର ସମୟ ପୂରିଯାଇଥିବା ଦିନ ଗ୍ରାହକ ବିଲ୍ ପରିମାଣ ଅର୍ଥ ଦେବାକୁ ଅକ୍ଷମ ହୁଏ, ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏହି ଦେୟତା ଗ୍ରହଣ କରିଥାଏ । ତେଣୁ ଏ ବିଷୟଟି ଦେୟତା ପାଖରେ ଦେଖିବାକୁ ମିଳିଥାଏ । ସ୍ବୀକୃତିରେ କ୍ଷତିଭୟ ଥିବାରୁ ସ୍ବୀକୃତି ଦାନକାରୀ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏକ କମିଶନ୍ ଅସୁଲ କରିଥାଏ । ଏହାକୁ ପାଉଣା ବା ପରିସମ୍ପତ୍ତି ପାଖରେ ଦେଖାଇବାର କାରଣ ହେଲା – ଏହି ଦାୟିତ୍ବ ଭରଣାପାଇଁ ଅର୍ଥ ଯୋଗାଇଦେବା ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କ ଦାୟିତ୍ଵ ।

ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ଦେୟତା ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଅନ୍ୟକୁ ଦେବାକୁ ଥିବା ବିଲ୍ ଅନ୍ୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରୁ ଆଣିଥିବା ଋଣ ଏବଂ ଆକସ୍ମିକ ଦେୟତା ଅନ୍ତର୍ଭୁକ୍ତ ।

ପାଉଣା ବା ପରିସମ୍ପରି (Assets) :
ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଅର୍ଥକୁ କେଉଁ ଉପାୟରେ ଉପଯୋଗ କରାଯାଇଛି, ପାଉଣା ପାଖରୁ ତାହା ଜଣାପଡ଼େ । ପାଉଣା ପାଖରେ ଥିବା ବିଷୟଗୁଡ଼ିକର ଆଲୋଚନା ନିମ୍ନରେ କରାଗଲା –

(i) ହାତରେ ଥିବା ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା – ଜମାକାରୀମାନଙ୍କଦ୍ୱାରା କରାଯାଉଥିବା ଉଠାଣ ନିମନ୍ତେ ଏକ ପ୍ରଥମ ଶ୍ରେଣୀୟ ସଞ୍ଚ୍ତି ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା କରିବାପାଇଁ ହାତରେ ମୁଦ୍ରା ରଖାଯାଇଥାଏ । ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କର ଚାହିଦାମାତ୍ରକେ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଆବଶ୍ୟକତା ପୂରଣ କରିବାପାଇଁ ନିଜ ପାଖରେ କିଛି ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଜୁତ ରଖୁଥାଏ । ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ ପାଖରେ ମଧ୍ୟ କିଛି ଅର୍ଥ ରଖାଯାଇପାରେ । ହାତରେ ଥିବା ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା କିଛି ଲାଭ ଅର୍ଜନ କରିନଥାଏ ।

ତେଣୁ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କର ଚାହିଦା ପୂରଣ କରିବାପାଇଁ ଯାହା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ତା’ଠାରୁ ଅଧିକ ଅର୍ଥ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଆକାରରେ ନିଜ ପାଖରେ ରଖୁନଥାଏ । ହାତରେ ଥିବା ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରାକୁ ହସ୍ତସ୍ଥ ମୁଦ୍ରା (till money) କହନ୍ତି ।

(ii) ଚାହିଦା ଓ ଅଳ୍ପ ସମୟ ନୋଟିସ୍‌ରେ ମିଳୁଥିବା ମୁଦ୍ରା – ଅତି ଅଳ୍ପ ସମୟ ନୋଟିସ୍‌ରେ ପରିଶୋଧଯୋଗ୍ୟ ସ୍ଵଳ୍ପକାଳୀନ ଋଣକୁ ଏହା ବୁଝାଇଥାଏ । ଏହି ଋଣଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଉପରେ ଅତି ଅଳ୍ପ ସୁଧ ହାର ମିଳିଥାଏ । କାରଣ ଅତି କମ୍ ସମୟ ନୋଟିସ୍‌ରେ ଏଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଫେରାଇ ଅଣାଯାଇପାରିବ । ଏହି ପାଉଣାକୁ ଅତି ସହଜରେ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରାରେ ପରିଣତ କରାଯାଇପାରିବ ।

ଯେତେବେଳେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସଞ୍ଚି ଅପ୍ରତ୍ୟାଶିତ ଭାବେ ହ୍ରାସ ପାଇଯାଇଥାଏ ଏହା ତତ୍‌କ୍ଷଣାତ୍‌ ଏହି ସ୍ଵଳ୍ପକାଳୀନ ଋଣରୁ କିଛି ପ୍ରତ୍ୟାହାର କରି ଆଣିଥାଏ କିମ୍ବା ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକର ନବୀକରଣ କରିବାକୁ ମନା କରିଦେଇଥାଏ ଯାହାକି ସାଧାରଣ ପରିସ୍ଥିତିରେ ନବୀକରଣ କରାଯାଇ ପାରିଥା’ନ୍ତା । ଏହା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ପ୍ରତିରକ୍ଷା ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ।

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Economics Chapter 15 Long Answer Questions in Odia Medium

(iii) ଅପହ୍ରାସିତ ବିଲ୍‌ – ଏହାର ପ୍ରକୃତି ପୂର୍ବରୁ ବୁଝାଇ ଦିଆଯାଇଛି । ବିଲ୍‌ଗୁଡ଼ିକ ସ୍ଵୟଂ ସମାପନୀୟ (Self liquidating) ହୋଇଥିବାରୁ ଏଥୁରୁ ବିନିଯୋଗ ଆକର୍ଷଣୀୟ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ପୁଣି, ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ସମୟକାଳ ପୂରିବା ପୂର୍ବରୁ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକ ପୁନଃ ଅପହ୍ରାସିତ କରାଯାଇପାରିବ ଏବଂ ଋଣଦେବା ଅପେକ୍ଷା ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଅଧ‌ିକ ନିରାପଦ ବୋଲି ମନେକରାଯାଇଥାଏ ।

(iv) ଆଦାୟ ଅବସ୍ଥାରେ ଥିବା ଚେକ୍ – ଏହା ଆଦାୟ କରାଯାଉଥିବା ଚେକ୍‌ଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ବୁଝାଇଥାଏ । ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଅତି ନଗଦ, କାରଣ ଚେକ୍‌ଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଆଦାୟ କରାଯିବା ମାତ୍ରେ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଜୁର ପରିମାଣ ବୃଦ୍ଧି ପାଏ ।

(v) ବିନିଯୋଗ – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ସରକାରୀ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି ଏବଂ ଘରୋଇ କମ୍ପାନୀମାନଙ୍କର ଅଂଶ ଓ ଡିବେଞ୍ଚରେ ଅର୍ଥ ବିନିଯୋଗ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ଏହି ବିନିଯୋଗଗୁଡ଼ିକ କମ୍ ନଗଦୀ ହୋଇଥିବାରୁ ସାଧାରଣତଃ ବିଲ୍ ଅପେକ୍ଷା ଅଧିକ ସୁଧହାର ବହନ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ସେଥୁରୁ ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଧାରିତ ଆୟ ମିଳିଥାଏ ଏବଂ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏଥୁରୁ ନିରବଚ୍ଛିନ୍ନଭାବେ ଲାଭ ପାଇଚାଲିଥାଏ ।

(vi) ଅଗ୍ରୀମ ଋଣ – ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏହାର ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କୁ ଏବଂ ବିଭିନ୍ନ ଉଦ୍ୟୋଗକୁ ଋଣ ଦେଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବ୍ୟବସାୟର ଏହି ଋଣ ହିଁ ପ୍ରଧାନ ଅଂଶ ହୋଇଥାଏ ।

(vii) ସ୍ୱୀକୃତି ଓ ପୃଷ୍ଠାଙ୍କନ – ଏହି ବିଷୟଟି ସନ୍ତୁଳନ ଫର୍ଦର ଉଭୟ ପାଖରେ ରହିଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଦ୍ଵାରା ସ୍ବୀକୃତ ବିଲ୍ ଦଲିଲ୍ ଏହାର ଅନ୍ତର୍ଭୁକ୍ତ । ବିଲ୍‌ଗୁଡ଼ିକର ସମୟ ପୂରିଗଲେ ବିଲ୍ ପରିମାଣ ଅର୍ଥ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏହାର ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କଠାରୁ ଆଦାୟ କରିବ । ତେଣୁ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଏହାର ପାଉଣା ।

ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର କୋଠାବାଡ଼ି, ଆସବାବପତ୍ର ଓ ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ସମ୍ପତ୍ତି ଆଦି ମଧ୍ୟ ପରିସମ୍ପତ୍ତି ଅନ୍ତର୍ଭୁକ୍ତ । ଏହା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସ୍ଥାବର – ଅସ୍ଥାବର ସମସ୍ତ ସମ୍ପତ୍ତିର ମୋଟ ମୂଲ୍ୟକୁ ବୁଝାଇଥାଏ । ଏଗୁଡ଼ିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ସ୍ଥାୟୀ ପରିସମ୍ପତ୍ତି ।

3. କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର କାର୍ଯ୍ୟାବଳୀ ବର୍ଣ୍ଣନା କର ।
Answer:
କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଦେଶର ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କାରବାର ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥାର ଶୀର୍ଷସ୍ଥାନରେ ରହିଥାଏ । ଏହା ସରକାରଙ୍କର ମୁଦ୍ରା ନୀତିକୁ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟକାରୀ କରିଥାଏ ଏବଂ ଦେଶର ସାଧାରଣ ଅର୍ଥନୈତିକ ସ୍ଥିରତା ରକ୍ଷା କରିଥାଏ । ଭାରତର କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ, ରିଜର୍ଭ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଅଫ୍ ଇଣ୍ଡିଆ ନାମରେ ପରିଚିତ । ଏହା 1935 ମସିହାରେ ପ୍ରତିଷ୍ଠା କରାଯାଇଥିଲା ।

କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର କାର୍ଯ୍ୟାବଳୀ :
ସଙ୍ଗଠନ, ଢାଞ୍ଚା, ନୀତି ଓ ପ୍ରବିଧ୍ ଦୃଷ୍ଟିରୁ ବିଚାର କଲେ ଦେଶ ଦେଶ ମଧ୍ୟରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଭିନ୍ନ ଭିନ୍ନ ହୋଇଥିବାର ଦେଖାଯାଇଥାଏ । କିନ୍ତୁ ସେମାନଙ୍କର କେତେଗୁଡ଼ିଏ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ ସମାନ ରହିଥିବାର ଦେଖାଯାଏ । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ପ୍ରଧାନ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟଗୁଡ଼ିକ ନିମ୍ନରେ ଆଲୋଚନା କରାଗଲା ।

(i) ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନକାରୀ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ (Bank of Issue) – କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନ କରିବାର ଏକାଧ୍ୟାକାର ରହିଛି । ଏହି ନୋଟଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଦେଶରେ ଆଇନାନୁମୋଦିତ ମୁଦ୍ରାରୂପେ ପ୍ରଚଳନ ହୋଇଥାଏ ଏବଂ ତାହାହିଁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚ୍ତି । ପ୍ରାୟ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ଦେଶରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନ ଏକାଧିକାର ଦିଆଯିବା ମୂଳରେ କେତେକ ଗୁରୁତ୍ଵପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ କାରଣ ରହିଛି । ପ୍ରଥମତଃ, ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନର କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀକରଣ ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନରେ ସମରୂପତା ଆଣିଥାଏ ।

ଅତୀତର ଅନେକ ସରକାରଙ୍କଦ୍ବାରା କରାଯାଇଥିବା ଅତିରିକ୍ତ ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନ ସରକାରୀ ମୁଦ୍ରା ପ୍ରଚଳନ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ଉପରେ ଅନାସ୍ଥା ଭାବ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିଥିଲା । ସରକାରଙ୍କଦ୍ବାରା ପ୍ରତ୍ୟକ୍ଷଭାବେ ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନ କରାଯାଇ ଯଦିଓ ସମରୂପତା ରକ୍ଷା କରାଯାଇପାରିଥା’ନ୍ତା ତଥାପି କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ଏହି କାରଣରୁ ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନର ସ୍ବତନ୍ତ୍ର ଏକାତ୍‌କାର ଦିଆଯାଇଛି । ଦ୍ୱିତୀୟତଃ, ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନ ଏକାଧିକାର ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କଦ୍ୱାରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରାଯାଉଥିବା ଋଣର ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିବାପାଇଁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ଫଳପ୍ରଦ କ୍ଷମତା ଦେଇଥାଏ ।

ତୃତୀୟତଃ, କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଦ୍ୱାରା ପ୍ରଚଳନ କରାଯାଉଥିବା ନୋଟ୍ ପଛରେ ରାଷ୍ଟ୍ରର ସମର୍ଥନ ରହିଥିବାରୁ ନୋଗୁଡ଼ିକ ସ୍ଵତନ୍ତ୍ର ମର୍ଯ୍ୟାଦା ପାଇଥା’ନ୍ତି । ଚତୁର୍ଥତଃ, ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନ ଏକାଧିକାର ଯୋଗୁଁ ଅନେକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଦ୍ୱାରା ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନଜନିତ ଗୁରୁତର ଦରଦାମ୍ ହ୍ରାସ ଓ ବୃଦ୍ଧି ଭୟକୁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଦୂର କରିଥାଏ ।

(ii) ସରକାରଙ୍କ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ (Banker to Government) – କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସରକାରଙ୍କ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ, ଏଜେଣ୍ଟ ଓ ପରାମର୍ଶଦାତାରୂପେ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରିଥାଏ । ସରକାରଙ୍କ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ହିସାବରେ ଏହା ଉଭୟ କେନ୍ଦ୍ର ଓ ରାଜ୍ୟ ସରକାରମାନଙ୍କର ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କାରବାରର ହିସାବ ରଖୁଥାଏ ଏବଂ ସରକାରଙ୍କ ତରଫରୁ ଅର୍ଥ ଗ୍ରହଣ ଓ ଅର୍ଥଦାନ କରିଥାଏ । ଅସ୍ଥାୟୀ ଅସୁବିଧା ଦୂର କରିବାପାଇଁ ଏହା ସରକାରଙ୍କୁ ସ୍ଵଳ୍ପକାଳୀନ ଋଣ ଓ ଅଗ୍ରିମ ଋଣ ଦେଇ ସାହାଯ୍ୟ କରିଥାଏ ।

ଏହି ଋଣକୁ କାମଚଳା ଋଣ (Ways and means advances) କୁହାଯାଏ । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ସବୁ ସରକାରୀ ଋଣ ଉଠାଣ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ଏହି ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମଧ୍ୟ ସରକାରୀ ଋଣର ପରିଚାଳନା କରିଥାଏ ଏବଂ ସରକାରଙ୍କୁ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଓ ଅର୍ଥନୈତିକ ବ୍ୟାପାର ଉପରେ ପରାମର୍ଶ ଦେଇଥାଏ ।

(iii) ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଗୁଡ଼ିକର ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚିର ତତ୍ତ୍ୱାବଧାରକ (Custodian of the Cash Reserves of Commercial Banks) – ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚିତିର ଏକ ଅଂଶ ଦେଶର କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ପାଖେ ଜମା ଆକାରରେ ରଖୁ’ନ୍ତି । ତେଣୁ ଏହା ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ (Banker’s Bank) ହୋଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ହିସାବରେ ଏହା ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚର ତତ୍ତ୍ୱାବଧାରକରୂପେ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରିଥାଏ ।

ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚିର କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀକରଣ ଦେଶର ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କାରବାର ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥାର ଦୃଢ଼ତାର ଏକ ପ୍ରଧାନ ଉତ୍ସ । ପ୍ରଥମତଃ, ଏହା ଆନ୍ତଃବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ହିସାବ ନିକାଶ କରିବାରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ସମର୍ଥ କରାଇଥାଏ । ଦ୍ବିତୀୟତଃ, ବିଭିନ୍ନ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରେ ବିକ୍ଷିପ୍ତଭାବେ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚି ରଖୁ ଅପେକ୍ଷା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀଭୂତ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚି ଦେଶର ଏକ ବୃହତ୍ତର ଓ ଅଧ୍ଵକ ସ୍ଥିତିସ୍ଥାପକ ଋଣ ଢାଞ୍ଚା ଭିତ୍ତିରୂପ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରିବ । ଏହାଦ୍ଵାରା ଋଣ ସମ୍ପ୍ରସାରଣ ପାଇଁ ରହିଥିବା ସେମାନଙ୍କ ସାମର୍ଥ୍ୟ ହ୍ରାସ ପାଇଥା’ନ୍ତା ।

ତୃତୀୟତଃ, କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀଭୂତ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସମ୍ପ୍ର ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କୁ ବିଭିନ୍ନ ସଙ୍କଟ ଓ ଜରୁରୀ ପରିସ୍ଥିତିର ସମ୍ମୁଖୀନ ହେବାକୁ ସମର୍ଥ କରାଇଥାଏ । ଚତୁର୍ଥତଃ, ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚତିକୁ ବୃଦ୍ଧି କରି ବା ହ୍ରାସ କରି ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କ୍ଷମତାକୁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରିତ କରିବାରେ ଏହା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ୍‌କୁ ସମର୍ଥ କରାଇଥାଏ ।

(iv) ଋଣଦାନର ଶେଷ ଆଶ୍ରୟସ୍ଥଳ (Lender of last resort) – କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ୍ ହିସାବରେ ବିତ୍ତୀୟ ଆବଶ୍ୟକତା ସମୟରେ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କୁ ସହାୟତା ପ୍ରଦାନ କରିଥାଏ । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କାରବାରର ଗୋଟିଏ ମୌଳିକ ନୀତି ହେଲା ଯେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଓ ସର୍ବୋଚ୍ଚ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କାରବାରର କର୍ତ୍ତା ହିସାବରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କୌଣସି ଉପଯୁକ୍ତ ଋଣଗ୍ରହୀତାକୁ ଋଣ ଦେବାପାଇଁ କେବେ ମନାକରି ନଥାଏ ।

ଏହା ଜରୁରିକାଳୀନ ଋଣର ଅନ୍ତିମ ଉତ୍ସ । ଯଦି ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ସୂତ୍ରରୁ ଋଣ ସୁବିଧା ପାଇବାକୁ ସମର୍ଥ ନ ହୁଅନ୍ତି ତେବେ ଶେଷ ଆଶ୍ରୟସ୍ଥଳ ବା ଅନ୍ତମ ଋଣଦାତା ହିସାବରେ ସେମାନେ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ଋଣ ସୁବିଧା ଯୋଗାଇଦେବାପାଇଁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ଅନୁରୋଧ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସେହି ସମୟରେ ଉପଯୁକ୍ତ ସରକାରୀ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି ରଖ୍ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କୁ ଋଣ ଯୋଗାଇ ଦେଇଥାଏ ।

ଋଣଦାତା ହିସାବରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ଶେଷ ଆଶ୍ରୟସ୍ଥଳ କହିବାର ଅର୍ଥ ହେଲା, ଅସୁବିଧା ସମୟରେ ଓ ସଙ୍କଟଜନକ ପରିସ୍ଥିତିରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ଋଣ ପାଇଁ ଥିବା ସମସ୍ତ ଯୁକ୍ତିଯୁକ୍ତ ଚାହିଦାକୁ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟକ୍ଷଭାବେ ବା ପରୋକ୍ଷଭାବେ ପୂରଣ କରିବାର ଦାୟିତ୍ଵ ଗ୍ରହଣ କରିଥାଏ । ଟ୍ରେଜେରୀ ବିଲ୍‌ଗୁଡ଼ିକର ପୁନଃ ଅପହାର ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥାଦ୍ୱାରା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମଧ୍ୟ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କପାଇଁ ଋଣ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା କରିଥାଏ । ତେଣୁ ଏହାକୁ ପୁନଃ ଅପହାର ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ (Bank of rediscount) ବୋଲି କୁହାଯାଏ ।

(v) ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରକ (Controller of Credit) – ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ହେଲା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଅନ୍ୟତମ ଅତି ଗୁରୁତ୍ଵପୂର୍ଣ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଚଳନ୍ତି ମୁଦ୍ରା ଓ ରଣର ପରିମାଣକୁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରି ଦେଶରେ ଅର୍ଥନୈତିକ ସ୍ଥିରତା ରକ୍ଷା କରିଥାଏ । ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନ କରିବାର ଏକାଧିକାର ଚଳନ୍ତ ମୁଦ୍ରାର ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ସହିତ ସମ୍ପୃକ୍ତ । ଦୁଇ ପ୍ରକାରର ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ରହିଛି; ଯଥା – ପରିମାଣାତ୍ମକ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ (Quantitative credit control) ଏବଂ ଗୁଣାତ୍ମକ ବା ନିର୍ବାଚିତ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ (Qualitative or selective credit control) ।

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Economics Chapter 15 Long Answer Questions in Odia Medium

ପରିମାଣାତ୍ମକ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ପ୍ରୟୋଗ କରିବାପାଇଁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ହାତରେ ଥିବା ପ୍ରଧାନ ଅସ୍ତ୍ର ହେଲା – ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସୁଧ ହାର ନୀତି (Bank rate policy), ଖୋଲା ବଜାର କାରବାର (Open market operation) ଏବଂ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚିର ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ (Variation of cash reserve) ଗୁଣାତ୍ମକ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ଋଣର ବିଭିନ୍ନ ବ୍ୟବହାର ଏହାର ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିଥାଏ । ଉଦାହରଣ – ସୀମାନ୍ତ ଆବଶ୍ୟକତା ନିର୍ଦ୍ଧାରଣ, ଖାଉଟୀ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ, ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ଏବଂ ଋଣ ପଡ଼ିପ୍ରଥା ପ୍ରଚଳନ, ନୈତିକ ପ୍ରରୋଚନା ଏବଂ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟକ୍ଷ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟାନୁଷ୍ଠାନ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିଥାଏ ।

ଉଦାହରଣ – ସୀମାନ୍ତ ଆବଶ୍ୟକତା ନିର୍ଦ୍ଧାରଣ, ଖାଉଟୀ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ, ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ଏବଂ ଋଣ ପଡ଼ିପ୍ରଥା ପ୍ରଚଳନ, ନୈତିକ ପ୍ରରୋଚନା ଏବଂ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟକ୍ଷ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟାନୁଷ୍ଠାନ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ । କିନ୍ତୁ ରଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣର ପରିମାଣାତ୍ମକ ପଦ୍ଧତି ସମସ୍ତ ପଦ୍ଧତି ମଧ୍ୟରେ ସବୁଠାରୁ ଅଧିକ ଫଳପ୍ରଦ । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଦେଶର ଚଳନ୍ତି ମୁଦ୍ରା ଓ ଋଣ ପରିମାଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିବାରେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସୁଧ ହାର ନୀତି, ଖୋଲା ବଜାର କାରବାର ଏବଂ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରାର ସଞ୍ଚିରେ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ ଆଦି ଅସ୍ତ୍ରକୁ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରିଥାଏ ।

କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଯେଉଁ ସର୍ବନିମ୍ନ ସରକାରୀ ହାରରେ ପ୍ରଥମ ଶ୍ରେଣୀୟ ବିନିମୟ ପତ୍ରକୁ ପୁନଃଅପହ୍ରାସ କରିବାକୁ ଏବଂ ଅନୁମୋଦିତ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି ଉପରେ ଅଗ୍ରିମ ଋଣ ଦେବାପାଇଁ ପ୍ରସ୍ତୁତ ଥାଏ ଏହାକୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସୁଧହାର କୁହାଯାଏ । ଏହି ହାରକୁ କମ୍ ବା ବେଶି କରି କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣକୁ ଶସ୍ତା ବା ବେଶି ମହଙ୍ଗା କରିଦେଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସୁଧହାର ବୃଦ୍ଧି ପାଇଲେ ଋଣ ଆଣିବା ଅଧିକ ବ୍ୟୟସାପେକ୍ଷ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସୁଧହାର ହ୍ରାସ ପାଇଲେ ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ସୁଧହାର ହ୍ରାସ ପାଇଥାଏ ଏବଂ ଋଣ ଆଣିବା ଅଧିକ ବ୍ୟୟସାପେକ୍ଷ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସୁଧହାର ହ୍ରାସ ପାଇଲେ ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ସୁଧହାର ହ୍ରାସ ପାଇଥାଏ ଏବଂ ଋଣ ଆଣିବା ଅପେକ୍ଷାକୃତ ଶସ୍ତା ହୁଏ ।

ଖୋଲା ବଜାର କାରବାର ହେଲା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଦ୍ଵାରା ଖୋଲା ବଜାରରେ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତିଗୁଡ଼ିକର କ୍ରୟବିକ୍ରୟ କରିବା । ଯଦି କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଦେଶରେ ଋଣ ପରିମାଣକୁ ହ୍ରାସ କରିବାକୁ ଇଚ୍ଛା କରୁଥାଏ ତେବେ ଏହା ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି ବିକ୍ରୟ କରେ । ଜନସାଧାରଣଙ୍କଦ୍ବାରା ଓ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କଦ୍ଵାରା ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି କ୍ରୟ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ହାତରେ ଥିବା ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ପରିମାଣକୁ ହ୍ରାସ କରିବ । ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚି ହ୍ରାସ ପାଇଲେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କଦ୍ୱାରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରାଯାଉଥବା ଋଣ ପରିମାଣ ହ୍ରାସ କରିବାପାଇଁ ସେମାନେ ବାଧ୍ୟ ହେବେ ।

ଯଦି କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣ ପରିମାଣ ବୃଦ୍ଧି କରିବାକୁ ଇଚ୍ଛା କରେ, ଏହା ବଜାରରୁ ଅନୁମୋଦିତ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି କ୍ରୟ କରିଥାଏ । ଏହାର ପରିଣାମରେ ଲୋକମାନଙ୍କ ହାତରେ ଓ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ ହାତରେ ଥିବା ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ପରିମାଣ ବୃଦ୍ଧି ପାଇବ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଜୁ ବୃଦ୍ଧିପାଇଲେ ସେମାନେ ଅଧ‌ିକ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବାପାଇଁ ଉତ୍ସାହିତ ହେବେ ।

କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସମ୍ପ୍ରତି ହାରର ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରି ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚିକୁ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟକ୍ଷଭାବେ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରିପାରିବ ଏବଂ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବାପାଇଁ ଥିବା ସେମାନଙ୍କ ସାମର୍ଥ୍ୟକୁ ପ୍ରଭାବିତ କରିପାରିବ । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଉଚ୍ଚତର ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚିତି ହାର ପ୍ରବର୍ତ୍ତନ କଲେ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଋଣ ପରିମାଣ ହ୍ରାସ କରିବାକୁ ବାଧ୍ୟ ହେବେ । ଅନ୍ୟପକ୍ଷରେ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସମ୍ପ୍ରତି ହାର ହ୍ରାସ ପାଇଲେ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ସତର୍କତାମୂଳକ ଋଣ ନୀତି ଅନୁସରଣ କରିବେ ନାହିଁ ଏବଂ ଋଣ ସମ୍ପ୍ରସାରଣ କରିବାପାଇଁ ଉତ୍ସାହିତ ହେବେ ।

(vi) ଦେଶର ବୈଦେଶିକ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚିତିର ତତ୍ତ୍ୱାବଧାରକ (Custodian of Nation’s Foreign Currency Reserves) – ଦେଶର ସ୍ବର୍ଣ୍ଣ ଓ ବୈଦେଶିକ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଞ୍ଚିର ସୁରକ୍ଷା ଓ ପରିଚାଳନା ଦାୟିତ୍ଵ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଉପରେ ନ୍ୟସ୍ତ କରାଯାଇଥାଏ । ଦରଦାମ୍ର ସ୍ଥିରତା ବଜାୟ ରଖ୍ବା ଏବଂ ପୂର୍ଣ ନିୟୋଜନ ଲକ୍ଷ୍ୟ ହାସଲ କରିବା ଆଦି ଜାତୀୟ ଲକ୍ଷ୍ୟଗୁଡ଼ିକ ହାସଲ କରିବାପାଇଁ ଦେଶର ମୁଦ୍ରା ଯୋଗାଣର ପରିଚାଳନା କରିବା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର କର୍ତ୍ତବ୍ୟ ।

ବିଶ୍ବବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ସଭ୍ୟ ଦେଶମାନଙ୍କରେ ଥିବା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଉପରେ ବିନିମୟ ହାର ସ୍ଥିରତା ରକ୍ଷା କରିବାର ଦାୟିତ୍ୱ ଦିଆଯାଇଛି । ସଂକ୍ଷେପରେ, କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଦେଶର ଚଳନ୍ତି ମୁଦ୍ରାର ଉଭୟ ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ ଓ ବହିରାଗତ ମୂଲ୍ୟର ରକ୍ଷକ ।

(vii) ବିକାଶର ବାହକ (Agent of Development) – ଭାରତ ଭଳି ସ୍ଵଳ୍ପ ବିକଶିତ ଦେଶରେ ଅର୍ଥନୈତିକ ବିକାଶଧାରାରେ ସାହାଯ୍ୟ କରିବାପାଇଁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଗୁଡ଼ିକ କ୍ରମେ ଅଧ୍ଯକ ଆଗ୍ରହ ପ୍ରକାଶ କରୁଛନ୍ତି । ଏହି ଦେଶଗୁଡ଼ିକରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ବିକାଶର ବାହକ ବା ଅର୍ଥନୈତିକ ବିକାଶର ଏକ ପ୍ରଧାନ ଅସ୍ତ୍ରରୂପେ ବିଚାର କରାଯାଉଛି ।

4. “ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ କେବଳ ଋଣ ବ୍ୟବସାୟ କରନ୍ତି ନାହିଁ, ସେମାନେ ମଧ୍ୟ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସର୍ଜନା କରନ୍ତି ।” – ଏହି ଉକ୍ତିର ତାତ୍ପର୍ଯ୍ୟ ଆଲୋଚନା କର ।
Answer:
ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଚଳନ୍ତି ଜମା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରି ଦେଶର ମୁଦ୍ରା ଯୋଗାଣକୁ ପ୍ରଭାବିତ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ସେହି କାରଣରୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ କେବଳ ଋଣ ବ୍ୟବସାୟୀ ନୁହଁନ୍ତି, ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟିକର୍ତ୍ତା ବୋଲି କୁହାଯାଏ । ବର୍ତ୍ତମାନ ଋଣମୁଦ୍ରା କିପରି ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରାଯାଏ ତାହା ଏକ ଉଦାହରଣ ସାହାଯ୍ୟରେ ବୁଝାଇ ଦିଆଯାଇପାରେ ।

ବ୍ୟୁତ୍ପନ୍ନ ଜମା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବାପାଇଁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କୁ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଅନୁଭୂତି ଓ ଅଭିଜ୍ଞତା ଉପରେ ନିର୍ଭର କରିବାକୁ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ଅଭିଜ୍ଞତାରୁ ସେମାନେ ଜାଣନ୍ତି ଯେ, ଜମାକାରୀମାନେ ଏକସମୟରେ ଜମା ପ୍ରତ୍ୟାହାର କରନ୍ତି ନାହିଁ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନିକଟରେ ଥିବା ଜମାରୁ କିଛି ସୁଧ ଆକାରରେ ଆୟ ମିଳୁଥିବାରୁ ଏବଂ ଜମା ନିରାପଦ ରହୁଥିବାରୁ ବିଶେଷ ଆବଶ୍ୟକତା ବ୍ୟତୀତ ଅନ୍ୟ ସମୟରେ ସେମାନେ ମୁଦ୍ରା ପ୍ରତ୍ୟାହାର କରିବାକୁ ଚାହିଁ ନଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

ଏହାଛଡ଼ା ପ୍ରତ୍ୟାହାର କରାଯାଉଥିବା ଜମାର ବହୁଳାଶ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଆକାରରେ କରା ନ ଯାଇ ହିସାବ ହସ୍ତାନ୍ତର ଆକାରରେ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ଏହି ଦୁଇଟି ଅନୁଭୂତିରୁ କୁହାଯାଇପାରେ ଯେ, ଜମାର କିୟଦଂଶ ମାତ୍ର ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଆକାରରେ ଉଠାଯାଏ ଏବଂ ଅବଶିତାଂଶ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରେ ରହିଥାଏ । ତେଣୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ମୋଟ ଜମାର କିଛି ଅଂଶ ଗଚ୍ଛିତ ରଖ୍ ଅବଶିଷ୍ଟ ଋଣ ଓ ଅଗ୍ରୀମ ସ୍ବରୂପ ଦେଇଥା’ନ୍ତି । ଉଦାହରଣସ୍ୱରୂପ, ମନେକରାଯାଉ ଜମାକାରୀମାନେ ଜମାର ମାତ୍ର ଶତକଡ଼ା ଦଶଭାଗ ନଗଦ ଆକାରରେ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟାହାର କରନ୍ତି ।

ତେଣୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଏହି ପରିମାଣ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଗଚ୍ଛିତ ରଖ୍ ଅବଶିଷ୍ଟକୁ ଋଣ ଆକାରରେ ଦିଅନ୍ତି । ପୁନଶ୍ଚ, ମନେକରାଯାଉ, ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ଦିନ 1000 ଟଙ୍କା ‘କ’ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରେ ପ୍ରାଥମିକ ଜମା ଆକାରରେ ରଖାଯାଏ । ‘କ’ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବର୍ତ୍ତମାନ ଏହି ଜମାର ଦଶ ଶତାଂଶ ଅର୍ଥାତ୍ 100 ଟଙ୍କା ମୁଦ୍ରା ଆକାରରେ ରଖ୍ ଅବଶିଷ୍ଟ 900 ଟଙ୍କା ଋଣ ଆକାରରେ ଦେଇପାରନ୍ତି ।

ଏହି 900 ଟଙ୍କା ବର୍ତ୍ତମାନ ‘ଖ’ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ୍‌ରେ ପ୍ରାଥମିକ ଜମା ରଖାଯାଏ । ‘ଖ’ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବର୍ତ୍ତମାନ 90 ଟଙ୍କା ସଂରକ୍ଷିତ ଅନୁପାତ ଆକାରରେ ରଖ୍ 810 ଟଙ୍କାକୁ ଋଣ ସ୍ୱରୂପ ଦେଇପାରନ୍ତି ଯାହାକି ‘ଗ’ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ପ୍ରାଥମିକ ଜମାସ୍ବରୂପ ଆସେ ।

‘ଗ’ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏହାର ଦଶମାଂଶ ଅର୍ଥାତ୍ 81 ଟଙ୍କା ନଗଦ ଆକାରରେ ରଖ୍ 729 ଟଙ୍କା ଋଣ ଆକାରରେ ଦେଇପାରନ୍ତି । ଏହିପରି ଭାବରେ ମୋଟ ଜମା ପ୍ରାଥମିକ ଜମାର ଦଶଗୁଣ ଅର୍ଥାତ୍ 10,000 ଟଙ୍କା ହେବା ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ଜମା ସୃଷ୍ଟି ଚାଲିଥାଏ ।

ଏହି ଉଦାହରଣରୁ ଜଣାଯାଏ ଯେ, ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟିର ପରିମାଣ ପ୍ରାଥମିକ ଜମା ଓ ସର୍ବନିମ୍ନ ସଂରକ୍ଷିତ ଅନୁପାତ ଉପରେ ନିର୍ଭର କରେ । ପ୍ରାଥମିକ ଜମା ଅଧ୍ବକ ହୋଇ ସଂରକ୍ଷିତ ଅନୁପାତ କମ୍ ହେଲେ ଋଣ ପରିଶୋଧ ଅଧ୍ଯକ ହୁଏ । ଏହାର ବିପରୀତ ଅବସ୍ଥାରେ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କମ୍ ହୋଇଥାଏ ।

ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି ପରିପ୍ରେକ୍ଷୀରେ ସ୍ମରଣ ରଖୁବାକୁ ହେବ ଯେ, କୌଣସି ଗୋଟିଏ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଋଣମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା କ୍ଷମତା ସୀମିତ । ଋଣମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥାର ସବୁ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ ସହଯୋଗରେ ସମ୍ଭବ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ଏହିପ୍ରକାର ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟିକୁ ଗୁଣିତକ ସର୍ଜନା କୁହାଯାଏ ।

ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବାରେ ସୀମାବଦ୍ଧତା – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଋଣମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତି ସତ, ମାତ୍ର ସେମାନଙ୍କର ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା ଶକ୍ତି ଅସୀମ ନୁହେଁ । ସେମାନଙ୍କର ଋଣମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା ଶକ୍ତି ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରାର ପରିମାଣ ଓ ସଂରକ୍ଷିତ ଅନୁପାତ ପ୍ରଭୃତି ଉପାଦାନ ଉପରେ ନିର୍ଭର କରେ । ସେ ସବୁର ଆଲୋଚନା ନିମ୍ନୋକ୍ତ ପ୍ରକାରେ କରାଯାଇପାରେ ।

(a) ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ ଅନୁପାତ – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଆଇନତଃ ବା ପରମ୍ପରାଗତଭାବେ ମୋଟ ଜମାର ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ଅଂଶ ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ କରି ରଖୁବାକୁ ବାଧ୍ୟ ହୋଇଥା’ନ୍ତି । ତେଣୁ ଯେଉଁ ଦେଶରେ ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ ଅନୁପାତ ଅଧିକ ସେ ଦେଶରେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ଋଣ ସୃଜନଶକ୍ତି ଅଧ‌ିକ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ସୁତରାଂ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ଋଣ ସୃଜନଶକ୍ତି ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ ଅନୁପାତଦ୍ୱାରା ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରିତ ହୋଇଥାଏ ।

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Economics Chapter 15 Long Answer Questions in Odia Medium

(b) ବିହ୍ୟ ଅନୁପାତ – ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ ପାଖରେ ଥିବା ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରାର ପରିମାଣ ଦେଶର ବିଧ୍ୱଂଗ୍ରାହ୍ୟ ମୁଦ୍ରା ପରିମାଣ ଉପରେ ନିର୍ଭର କରେ । ଦେଶର ଅଧ‌ିକ ପରିମାଣ ମୁଦ୍ରା ପ୍ରଚଳିତ ହେଉଥିଲାବେଳେ ଅଧିକ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଜମା ଆକାରରେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ଆସିଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କରେ ନଗଦ ଜମା ବୃଦ୍ଧି ହେବାଫଳରେ ଋଣମୁଦ୍ରା ପରିମାଣ ବୃଦ୍ଧି ପାଏ ଓ ଜମା ହ୍ରାସ ହେଲେ ଋଣମୁଦ୍ରା ହ୍ରାସ ହୁଏ । ସୁତରାଂ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା ଶକ୍ତି ମୁଦ୍ରା ଯୋଗାଣଦ୍ୱାରା ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରିତ ହୋଇଥାଏ ।

(c) ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ପାଇଁ ମାନ୍ୟତା – ସାଧାରଣତଃ ଲୋକମାନେ ନିଜ ନିଜର ସଞ୍ଚୟକୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମାର୍ଫିତରେ ନରଖ୍ ନିଜ ପାଖରେ ରଖୁବାକୁ ପସନ୍ଦ କରନ୍ତି । ସେମାନଙ୍କର ଏହି ପ୍ରବୃତ୍ତି ଦେଶର ଆର୍ଥିକ ଅବସ୍ଥା ଓ ବ୍ୟକ୍ତିଗତ ପସନ୍ଦ ଉପରେ ନିର୍ଭର କରେ । ଲୋକମାନେ ଯଦି ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମାର୍କତରେ ତାଙ୍କ ଜମା ନରଖ୍ ନିଜ ନିଜ ପାଖରେ ରଖିବାକୁ ଚାହାନ୍ତି, ତେବେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଜମା ପରିମାଣ ବୃଦ୍ଧି ପାଇପାରେ ନାହିଁ କି ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଯୋଗାଣ ବୃଦ୍ଧି ହୋଇପାରେ ନାହିଁ ।

(d) ପ୍ରତିଭୂତିର ସୁଲଭତା – ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଋଣ ବା ଅଗ୍ରୀମ ଦେବାପାଇଁ ଋଣକର୍ତ୍ତାଙ୍କଠାରୁ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି ଚାହିଁଥା’ନ୍ତି । ଏହି ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି ଦ୍ରବ୍ୟ ଆକାରରେ ହୋଇପାରେ ବା ବ୍ୟକ୍ତିକ ହୋଇପାରେ । ଉପଯୁକ୍ତ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତିର ଅଭାବରୁ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି ସୀମିତ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ରାଉଦର ଏହି କାରଣରୁ ମତ ଦେଇଛନ୍ତି ଯେ, ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଶୂନ୍ୟରୁ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରେନାହିଁ । ଏହା କେବଳ ଅନ୍ୟଧରଣର ପରିସମ୍ପତ୍ତିକୁ ମୁଦ୍ରାରେ ପରିଣତ କରିଥାଏ । ସୁତରାଂ, କୁହାଯାଇପାରେ ଯେ, ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ଋଣ ସର୍ଜନାଶକ୍ତି ପ୍ରତିଭୂତିର ସୁଲଭତାଦ୍ବାରା ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରିତ ହୋଇଥାଏ ।

(e) ମୁଦ୍ରାର ସ୍ଖଳନ – ମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଜନ ପ୍ରକ୍ରିୟାରେ ଗୋଟିଏ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରୁ ଋଣ ନେଇ ଅନ୍ୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରେ ଜମା କରୁଥିବା ଅନୁମାନ କରିବାକୁ ହୁଏ; କିନ୍ତୁ ସେ ଯେ ରଣକୁ ଅନ୍ୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରେ ଜମା ରଖୁବେ ସେ ବିଷୟରେ କୌଣସି ନିଶ୍ଚିତତା ନାହିଁ । ସେ ଯଦି ଋଣକୁ ଜମା ଆକାରରେ ନ ରଖ୍ ନିଜ ନିକଟରେ ରଖନ୍ତି ତେବେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଜମା ବୃଦ୍ଧି ହୁଏ ନାହିଁ କି ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରାରେ ଯୋଗାଣ ବୃଦ୍ଧି ହୁଏ ନାହିଁ ।

(f) ଋଣ ଗ୍ରହଣ ଓ ଋଣଦାନ ଅଭିପ୍ରାୟ – ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି, ଋଣଦାତା ଓ ଋଣଗ୍ରହୀତାଙ୍କ ଇଚ୍ଛା ଉପରେ ନିର୍ଭର କରେ । ଋଣଦାତା ଋଣ ଦେବାପାଇଁ ଆଗ୍ରହ ପ୍ରକାଶ କରୁଥିଲାବେଳେ ଯଦି ଋଣକର୍ତ୍ତା ଋଣ ନେବାପାଇଁ ଆଗ୍ରହୀ ନ ହୁଅନ୍ତି ତେବେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ପକ୍ଷରେ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା ସମ୍ଭବପର ହୁଏ ନାହିଁ । ସେହି ଯୁକ୍ତି ଋଣଦାତାମାନଙ୍କପାଇଁ ମଧ୍ୟ ପ୍ରଯୁଜ୍ୟ । ଏଣୁ ଋଣଦାତା ଓ ଋଣକର୍ତ୍ତା ଇଚ୍ଛା ଉପରେ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି ନିର୍ଭର କରେ ।

(g) ବ୍ୟବସାୟର ଅବସ୍ଥା – ଦେଶର ବ୍ୟାବସାୟିକ ଅବସ୍ଥା ଓ ଆର୍ଥନୀତିକ ସ୍ଥିରତା ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରାର ଯୋଗାଣକୁ ପ୍ରଭାବିତ କରେ । ବ୍ୟାବସାୟିକ ଉତ୍‌ଥାନ ଅବସ୍ଥାରେ ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଯୋଗାଣ ବୃଦ୍ଧି ହୋଇଥାଏ ଓ ପତନାବସ୍ଥାରେ ଋଣ ଯୋଗାଣ ହ୍ରାସ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ପୂର୍ବୋକ୍ତ ଅବସ୍ଥାରେ ବ୍ୟବସାୟୀମାନେ ଆଶାବାଦୀ ହୋଇ ଉତ୍ପାଦନ ବୃଦ୍ଧି କରନ୍ତି ଏବଂ ଏଥିପାଇଁ ଅଧିକ ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ କରନ୍ତି । ତେଣୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା ସୁଯୋଗ ଲାଭ କରନ୍ତି ।

ବିପରୀତ ଅବସ୍ଥାରେ ଯେତେବେଳେ ଦରଦାମ୍ ହ୍ରାସ ହେଉଥାଏ ଓ ଲାଭ ଆଶା ମଉଳି ଯାଉଥାଏ, ସେତେବେଳେ ଋଣ ପାଇଁ ଚାହିଦା କମିଯାଏ ଓ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଋଣ ସମ୍ପ୍ରସାରଣ କରନ୍ତି ନାହିଁ ।

(h) କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନୀତି – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତି । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସେମାନଙ୍କର ଋଣ ସର୍ଜନା କାର୍ଯ୍ୟକୁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରେ । ସେତେବେଳେ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଅତ୍ୟଧ୍ଵ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରୁଥିବା ସୂଚନା ମିଳେ ଏବଂ ଏପରି ଋଣ ସର୍ଜନା ଦେଶର ସାମୂହିକ ହିତର ପରିପନ୍ଥୀ ବିବେଚିତ ହୁଏ, ସେତେବେଳେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବିଭିନ୍ନ ପନ୍ଥାର ଆଶ୍ରୟ ନେଇ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଋଣ ସର୍ଜନା ଶକ୍ତି ହ୍ରାସ କରେ ।

(i) ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି- ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା ଗୋଟିଏ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କଦ୍ୱାରା ସମ୍ଭବପର ହୁଏ ନାହିଁ । ସେଥିପାଇଁ ଏକାଧ୍ଵକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏପରିକି ସମଗ୍ର ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ଜଡ଼ିତ ହେବା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ହୋଇଥାଏ ।

ଏହିସବୁ କାରଣରୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ଋଣ ସୃଜନ ଶକ୍ତି ଅସୀମ ନୁହେଁ ବୋଲି କୁହାଯାଏ ।

5. ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଓ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ପାର୍ଥକ୍ୟ ଦର୍ଶାଅ ।
Answer:
କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଓ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମଧ୍ୟରେ କେତେକ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟଗତ ପାର୍ଥକ୍ୟ ପରିଲକ୍ଷିତ ହୁଏ ।
ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକ ହେଲା –
(i) ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଲାଭ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟାଶା ରଖ୍ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରନ୍ତି | ଲାଭ ନ ପାଇଲେ, ସେମାନେ ତିଷ୍ଠି ରହିପାରନ୍ତି ନାହିଁ; କିନ୍ତୁ ଲାଭ ଅର୍ଜନ କରିବା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ମୁଖ୍ୟ ଉଦ୍ଦେଶ୍ୟ ନୁହେଁ । ଏହାର ପ୍ରଧାନ ଉଦ୍ଦେଶ୍ୟ ହେଲା – ମୁଦ୍ରା ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥା ଓ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବ୍ୟବସ୍ଥାକୁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିବା ଏବଂ ଦେଶରେ ଆର୍ଥନୀତିକ ସ୍ଥିରତା ରକ୍ଷା କରିବା ।

(ii) ଦେଶରେ ବହୁସଂଖ୍ୟକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ପରସ୍ପର ସହଯୋଗିତାରେ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରନ୍ତି । ସେମାନେ ଜନସାଧାରଣଙ୍କ ସହିତ ସମ୍ପର୍କ ରଖ୍ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରନ୍ତି । ମାତ୍ର ପ୍ରତି ଦେଶରେ ଗୋଟିଏ ମାତ୍ର କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରେ । ଏହା ଲୋକମାନଙ୍କ ସହିତ ବ୍ୟାବସାୟିକ ସମ୍ପର୍କ ରଖେ ନାହିଁ ।

(iii) ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ସରକାରଙ୍କ ସହିତ ଘନିଷ୍ଠ ସମ୍ପର୍କ ନଥାଏ । ସେମାନେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ସରକାରୀ କର୍ତ୍ତୃପକ୍ଷଙ୍କ ସହିତ ସମ୍ପର୍କ ସ୍ଥାପନ କରନ୍ତି; କିନ୍ତୁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଜାତୀୟ ସ୍ବାର୍ଥର ସୁରକ୍ଷାକଳ୍ପେ ସରକାରଙ୍କ ସହିତ ଘନିଷ୍ଠ ସମ୍ପର୍କ ରକ୍ଷା କରେ ।

(iv) ଜନସାଧାରଣ ହେଉଛନ୍ତି ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ ଗ୍ରାହକ । ସେମାନେ ଏହି ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କରେ ପାଣ୍ଠି ଜମା ରଖନ୍ତି । ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କୁ ଆବଶ୍ୟକତା ବିଚାରରେ ଋଣ ଦେଇଥା’ନ୍ତି । ସେମାନେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଗ୍ରାହକ । ସେମାନେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନିକଟରେ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ସମ୍ବଳର କିଛି ଅଂଶ ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ କରନ୍ତି । ଏହା ସାହାଯ୍ୟରେ ଆନ୍ତଃବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଦେୟତା ପରିଶୋଧ ହୁଏ ।

କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସେମାନଙ୍କୁ ଆପଦ ବିପଦରେ ଋଣ ଆକାରରେ ସାହାଯ୍ୟ କରେ । ମୋଟ ଉପରେ କହିବାକୁ ଗଲେ ଜନସାଧାରଣଙ୍କର ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ ସହିତ ଯେଉଁ ସମ୍ପର୍କ ଥାଏ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସହିତ ସେହି ସମ୍ପର୍କ ଥାଏ ।

(v) ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତି । ମାତ୍ର କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରେ ନାହିଁ । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଯେଉଁ ନୋଟ୍ ପ୍ରଚଳନ କରନ୍ତି, ତାହା ଦେଶରେ ବିଗ୍ରାହ୍ୟ ମୁଦ୍ରା ରୂପେ ପ୍ରଚଳିତ ହୁଏ । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରୁଥିବା ରଣମୁଦ୍ରାକୁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରେ । ଏହି ଦୃଷ୍ଟିରୁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ ସହିତ ପ୍ରତିଯୋଗିତା କରେ ନାହିଁ ।

(vi) ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦେଶ ମାନି ଚଳିବାକୁ ବାଧ୍ୟ ହୋଇଥା’ନ୍ତି । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟାକଳାପକୁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରେ ।

6. କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ପରିମାଣାତ୍ମକ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ପଦ୍ଧତି ବର୍ଣ୍ଣନା କର ।
Answer:
ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କଦ୍ୱାରା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରାଯାଉଥିବା ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରାର ଯୋଗାଣକୁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିବା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଏକ ଗୁରୁତ୍ବପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟରୂପେ ବିବେଚିତ ହୁଏ । ଏଥିପାଇଁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଦୁଇଟି ପନ୍ଥାର ଆଶ୍ରୟ ନେଇଥାଏ; ଯଥା- ପରିମାଣାତ୍ମକ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ଓ ଗୁଣାତ୍ମକ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ । ମୁଦ୍ରାର ପରିମାଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିବାପାଇଁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମୁଖ୍ୟତଃ ତିନୋଟି ଅସ୍ତ୍ର ପ୍ରୟୋଗ କରିଥାଏ ।
ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକ ହେଲା-
(i) ସୁଧହାର
(ii) ଖୋଲାବଜାର କାରବାର
(iii) ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ ହାର ।

(i) ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କହାର ବା ସୁଧହାର ନୀତି- ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କହାର କହିଲେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସରକାରୀ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି ଏବଂ ପ୍ରଥମ ଶ୍ରେଣୀୟ ବିନିମୟପତ୍ରର ଅବମୂଲ୍ୟନ ହାରକୁ ବୁଝାଯାଏ । ଯେତେବେଳେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କହାର ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରାଯାଏ, ସେତେବେଳେ ବଜାରରେ ପ୍ରଚଳିତ ସୁଧହାର ମଧ୍ୟ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତିତ ହୋଇଥାଏ । ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ହାର ଓ ସୁଧହାର ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଘନିଷ୍ଠ ସମ୍ପର୍କ ରହିଛି । ଅର୍ଥାତ୍ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କହାର ବୃଦ୍ଧି ହେଲେ ସୁଧହାର ଅଧ‌ିକ ହେବା ଯୋଗୁଁ ଋଣ କରିବା ନିରୁତ୍ସାହିତ ହୁଏ ଏବଂ ଏହାଫଳରେ ଋଣ ପରିମାଣ ହ୍ରାସ ହୁଏ । ସେହିପରି ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କହାର ହ୍ରାସ ହେଲେ ବଜାର ସୁଧହାର ହ୍ରାସ ହୁଏ ଏବଂ ଋଣ କାରବାର ବୃଦ୍ଧି ହୁଏ ।

(ii) ଖୋଲାବଜାର କାରବାର- ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କହାର ପରି ଖୋଲାବଜାର କାରବାର ହେଉଛି କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ପାରମ୍ପରିକ ଅସ୍ତ୍ର । ଖୋଲାବଜାର କାରବାରରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସରକାରୀ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି କ୍ରୟ ବିକ୍ରୟ କରିଥାଏ । ବଜାରରେ ଋଣ କାରବାର ହ୍ରାସ କରିବା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ହେଲେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଜନସାଧାରଣଙ୍କୁ ଓ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କୁ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି ବିକ୍ରୟ କରିଥାଏ । ଏହାଫଳରେ ଲୋକମାନଙ୍କଠାରୁ ଓ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କଠାରୁ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କକୁ ହସ୍ତାନ୍ତର ହୋଇଥାଏ ।

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Economics Chapter 15 Long Answer Questions in Odia Medium

ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ ହ୍ରାସ ହେବା କାରଣରୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କସମୂହ ଋଣ ପରିମାଣ ହ୍ରାସ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି । ସେହିପରି ଋଣ ଯୋଗାଣ ବୃଦ୍ଧି କରିବା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ହେଲେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଖୋଲାବଜାରରୁ ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି କ୍ରୟ କରି ନେଇଥାଏ । ଏହାଫଳରେ ଜନସାଧାରଣ ଓ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କର ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ପରିମାଣ ବୃଦ୍ଧି ହୋଇଥାଏ । ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଅଧ‌ିକ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବାପାଇଁ ସମର୍ଥ ହୋଇଥା’ନ୍ତି । ଏହିପରି ଭାବରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଯୋଗାଣକୁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

(iii) ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ ହାର ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ- ପରମ୍ପରାଗତଭାବେ ହେଉ ବା ଆଇନତଃ ହେଉ, ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କସମୂହ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଜମାର ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ଅନୁପାତ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନିର୍ଦେଶରେ ନଗଦ ମୁଦ୍ରା ଆକାରରେ ଗଚ୍ଛିତ ରଖୁଥା’ନ୍ତି । ଯେତେବେଳେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନଗଦ ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ ଅନୁପାତକୁ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତି, ସେତେବେଳେ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ତାହା ପାଳନ କରିଥା’ନ୍ତି ।

ଋଣ ସଂକୋଚନ କରିବା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ମନେକଲେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନିକଟରେ ଥିବା ନଗଦ ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ ହ୍ରାସ ହୁଏ ଏବଂ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା ସାମର୍ଥ୍ୟ ହ୍ରାସ ପାଇଥାଏ । ସେହିପରି ସଂରକ୍ଷଣ ଅନୁପାତ ହ୍ରାସ କରି କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣ ସୃଷ୍ଟିକୁ ଉତ୍ସାହିତ କରିଥାଏ ।

7.କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ଗୁଣାତ୍ମକ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ପଦ୍ଧତି ବର୍ଣ୍ଣନା କର ।
Answer:
କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଗୁଣାତ୍ମକ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କଲାବେଳେ ନିମ୍ନଲିଖତ କୌଶଳ ଅବଲମ୍ବନ କରିଥାଏ ।
(i) ଉପଭୋକ୍ତାଙ୍କ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ- ଏହି ପଦ୍ଧତିରେ ଅପେକ୍ଷାକୃତ ସ୍ଥାୟୀ ଉପଭୋଗ ଦ୍ରବ୍ୟର ବ୍ୟବହାରକୁ ଋଣ ଜରିଆରେ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରାଯାଇଥାଏ । ରେଡ଼ିଓ, ଟେଲିଭିଜନ, ମଟରଗାଡ଼ି ଓ ରେଫ୍ରିଜିରେଟର ପ୍ରଭୃତି କ୍ରୟ ପାଇଁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଋଣ ଯୋଗାଇଥା’ନ୍ତି । କାରଣ ଏହିସବୁ ଦ୍ରବ୍ୟର ମୂଲ୍ୟ ଅଧ‌ିକ ହୋଇଥିବାରୁ ଲୋକମାନେ ଦାମ୍ ଏକକାଳୀନ ଦେଇ କ୍ରୟ କରିପାରନ୍ତି ନାହିଁ । ତେଣୁ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଗ୍ରାହକମାନଙ୍କ ପାଇଁ ଦ୍ରବ୍ୟର ମୂଲ୍ୟ ପରିଶୋଧ କରେ ଏବଂ ସେମାନଙ୍କଠାରୁ ସହଜ କିସ୍ତିରେ ପରିଶୋଧ ପାଇଥାଏ ।

ଯେତେବେଳେ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଅନୁଭବ କରେ ଯେ, ଏହିପ୍ରକାର ଋଣ ଉତ୍ସାହିତ କରାଯିବା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ, ସେତେବେଳେ କିସ୍ତି ସଂଖ୍ୟା ଅଧ୍ବକ କରିଥାଏ ଏବଂ ଯେତେବେଳେ ଏହିସବୁ ଦ୍ରବ୍ୟର ଉପଭୋଗକୁ ନିରୁତ୍ସାହିତ କରିବା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ହୁଏ, ସେତେବେଳେ କିସ୍ତି ସଂଖ୍ୟା ହ୍ରାସ କରିଥାଏ । କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦେଶକ୍ରମେ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ପରିଚାଳିତ ହୋଇ ଏହିପ୍ରକାର ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ଜାରି କରନ୍ତି ।

(ii) ପ୍ରୟୋଜନୀୟ ନଗଦଂଶ ନିରୂପଣ – ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ଅନୁଯାୟୀ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ପ୍ରୟୋଜନୀୟ ନଗତାଂଶକୁ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରି ଋଣ ପରିମାଣକୁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିଥାଏ । ଏହାଦ୍ୱାରା ପରିକଳ୍ପିତ ଉଦ୍ଦେଶ୍ୟରେ ବ୍ୟବହୃତ ଋଣକୁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରାଯାଇପାରେ । ଉଦାହରଣସ୍ୱରୂପ, 1000 ଟଙ୍କା ପ୍ରତିଭୂତି ବଦଳରେ ଯଦି ଟ,800.00 ଙ୍କା ଋଣ ମିଳେ ତେବେ ପ୍ରୟୋଜନୀୟ ନଗତାଂଶ 200 ଟଙ୍କା ବୁଝିବାକୁ ହୁଏ । ପ୍ରୟୋଜନୀୟ ନଗତାଂଶ ଅଧ୍ଵ ହେଲେ ଋଣ ଚାହିଦା ହ୍ରାସ ହୁଏ ଏବଂ ତାହା କମ୍ ହେଲେ ଋଣ ଚାହିଦା ବୃଦ୍ଧି ପାଏ ।

(iii) ପ୍ରତ୍ୟକ୍ଷ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟାନୁଷ୍ଠାନ – ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ମନେକଲେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ ଋଣ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ଉପରେ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟକ୍ଷ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟାନୁଷ୍ଠାନ ଗ୍ରହଣ କରେ । ଯଦି କୌଣସି ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦେଶକୁ ଅମାନ୍ୟ କରେ ବା ଋଣନୀତିର ବିରୁଦ୍ଧାଚରଣ କରେ, ତେବେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ସେହି ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ବିନିମୟପତ୍ର ପୁନଃ ଅବମୂଲ୍ୟାୟନ କରିବାକୁ ଅସ୍ଵୀକାର କରିପାରେ ଏବଂ ଋଣ ଆବେଦନ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟାଖ୍ୟାନ କରିପାରେ ।

(iv) ରଣ ପଢ଼ି ପ୍ରଥା- ଋଣ ପଡ଼ି ପ୍ରଥା ପ୍ରଚଳନ କରି କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣର ସୁଷମ ବଣ୍ଟନ କରିଥାଏ । ଶିଳ୍ପମାନଙ୍କୁ ଏହାଫଳରେ ଆବଶ୍ୟକତା ଓ ବାଞ୍ଛନୀୟତା ବିଚାରରେ ଋଣ ଯୋଗାଇପାରେ । ଏ ବିଷୟରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ନିଷ୍ପତ୍ତି ଗ୍ରହଣ କରେ ଏବଂ ତଦନୁଯାୟୀ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କୁ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦେଶ ଦିଏ ।

(v) ନୈତିକ ଚାପ – ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଓ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଘନିଷ୍ଠ ସମ୍ପର୍କ ଥିବାରୁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଏହାର ରଣନୀତି ଅନୁସରଣ ପାଇଁ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କ ଉପରେ ନୈତିକ ଚାପ ପକାଇଥାଏ । କେଉଁ କ୍ଷେତ୍ରକୁ ଋଣ ଦେବା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ଓ କେଉଁ କ୍ଷେତ୍ରକୁ ଋଣ ଦେବା ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ନୁହେଁ, ସେ ବିଚାର କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ କରିଥାଏ ଏବଂ ତଦନୁଯାୟୀ ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନଙ୍କୁ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରିବାପାଇଁ ଉପଦେଶ ଦେଇଥାଏ ।

ବାଣିଜ୍ୟିକ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କମାନେ ଏହି ନୈତିକ ଚାପର ବଶବର୍ତ୍ତୀ ହୋଇ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କର ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦେଶକ୍ରମେ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ କରନ୍ତି ।

ଏହିପରି ଭାବରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ବ୍ୟାଙ୍କ ଋଣର ଗୁଣାତ୍ମକ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିଥାଏ ।

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Long Answer Questions

Odisha State Board CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Solutions Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Long Answer Questions.

CHSE Odisha 12th Class Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Long Answer Questions

Long Questions With Answers

Question 1.
What do you mean by Unity in diversity? Discuss the various factors promoting unity in India?
Answer:
In spite of diversity, there is unity in India. There are bonds of unity may be located in certain mechanisms of integration Herbert Rosley census commissioner in 1911, was right when he observed “Beneath the manifold diversity of physical and social type, language, custom and religion which strikes the observer and in India.

there can still be discovered a certain underlying uniformity of life from the Himalayas to cape Cambrian. The concept of one united India has always been the fascinating idea of many great thinkers of this land. Since time immemorial India has been regarded as. one district society, unity in India. In the production of certain factors. We will now describe each of them.

Geographical Unity:
From a very early time. India has been visualised as one nation covering the whole landmass from the Himalayas to the ocean on the other sides. The Aryan thinkers and other philosophers named this landmass as Bharat Varsha. The term Bharat Varsha i.e., India has always referred to thus the vast expense of the land expanding from the Himalayas in North to the cap commotion on the South and from the Brahmputra in the East to the Indus in the west. These natural boundaries give the land geographical unity.

Religious Unity:
Although India in a land of many religions, religion has been one of the bases of national unity. As Srinivas says. The concept of the unity of India is essentially a religious one Hinduism being the religion of the majority of the people of India provides a basis for unity. Religious unity of the country in expressed through the existence of pilgrimage centres of great spiritual merits in the four parts of the country. Badrinaryan in the North. Rameswaram in the South, Dwarika in the West and Puri in the East eloquently speak the religious unity in India.

Cultural Unity :
India has cultural unity. The fundamental approaches to art, philosophy and literature are typically Indian in the character. Social institutions like the caste system and the joint family are found all over India which are once again topically Indian. Caste in such a widespread social institution in India that every Indian whether a Hindu, a Muslim or a Christian finds himself a universe of caste. These common social institutions and cultural traditions faster unity among the Indians.

Political Unity :
India has also political unity in India in the product of cultural and religious unity. The idea of bringing the whole country under one central authority is not new to Indians. Unification of vast areas and populations under one rule has been the highest goal of the kings statements. The ancient Indian political concept of Chakravarti clearly refers to the idea of political unification of the whole land. Many great kings right from Dilip, Yayati, Mandhata and Yudhisthira to Chandragupta Maurya.

Ashoka and Samudra Gupta of the later period had established there in sovereignty almost all over India the country and achieved the distinction of being a Chartkravai or universal ever lord. In the past kings often waged wars on one another with another purpose than to achieve thus indicating that religious support extended to the idea of political unification of the country.

Emotional Unity:
Last but not least there is an emotional bond that binds all the inhabitants of this vast land. The very name Bharat Mata emotionally brings all Indians together. Although linguistic diversity poses a threat to emotional integration, Sanskrit being the mother of all Indian languages serves as a significant untying bond in the emotional integration of the people.

A tradition of Independence:
We have had a remarkable tradition to independence which has held us together throughout countries. One manifestation is found in the form of the jamjar system. It is a system of independence of castes. The term Jajamani refers generally to a relationship between food-producing formally and the families that supported them with goods and services. These came to be called the Jajamani relations Jajamani system as the backbone of rural economy and social order under this system each caste group within a village is expected to give certain stand and used services to the families of other castes.

The tradition of Accommodation:
We have heard of the syncretic quality of Indian culture and its remarkable quality of accommodation and tolerance. Hinduism, which is the majority religion of India has an elastic character. We know that Hinduism as not a homogeneous religion. It is not a religion having one God, one book and one temple. It is described as a federation of faiths. goes to the extent of accommodating village-level deities of the tribal faiths. Hinduism has been open religion an encompassing religion.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Long Answer Questions

Question 2.
Write a brief essay on the “Unity in Diversity” in Indian society. Or, Indian Society essentially presents a “Unity in Diversity”.Discuss?
Answer:
India is not only the world’s largest but also probably the most complex federal democracy. While its democratic structure protects its political unity, its federal form guarantees the harmonious co-existence of socio-cultural diversities. That is why political unity is super imposed by the constitution and cherished by the major national parties.

The world has seldom known a country like India with an age-old socio-cultural diversity which gives a unique impression of pluralism. None of the federal politics, old or new, the bourgeoisie or socialist, Imperial Prussia, Austro-Hungarian Empire, Switzerland, United States, Canada, Nigeria, Malaysia, Yugoslavia or the Soviet Union are known to encompass such a wide range of distinct sub-national identities and that too with a long historical past as is the case with India.

Viewing the unity and its rich cultural heritage intellectuals say that India presents diversity in unity while others say that “India presents unity in diversity.” It is a fact that India is the second-largest state in the world in terms of population. It is the sixth-largest state in terms of territory. All the eight major religious communities of the world have a place in this benevolent motherland.

The problems of Indian society are very in number. Conflict takes place between states for sharing of river water. Still, there is a border dispute between different states. The terrorist and secessionist activities in different parts of India poses threat to Are very unity of India. The crossing of borders from alien countries creates very many problems in Indian society. There are several diversifying factors, among Communication, Casteism, Linguism and Regionalism are notable.

Communalism in Indian society refers to feelings of rivalry based on religious differences. We all know communalism was responsible for the division of the country into India and Pakistan in 1947. Even partition could not solve this problem in India because it still left a large Muslim minority in the country. The world’s major religious groups are found in India.

They are Hindus, Muslims, Christians, Sikhs, Buddhists, Jains, Parsis and Jews. Apart from the tribes who also constitute about 7% of the total Indian population, Hindus constitute an overwhelming majority which in percentages is about four times more than the total of all the other religious communities put together. Adherence to religion and the religious system is not communalism.

The exploitation of religion is communalism. Using a religious community against other communities and against nations is communalism. So, due to religious differences, sometimes conflicts and tensions are created among people of different communities. The political parties at the centre create a vote bank in favour of them depending upon religious groups. This appeasement policy of govt creates hatred feeling among other communities.

Now, there is not uniform civil code for all the nationals of India. Though there is a provision in the constitution in favour of a common civil code. Such a critical period is dawned that the national song for every people comes into question. Some of religious groups are getting assistance from outside to disturb national development and also to disintegrate Indian society.

Casteism is another serious problem in the way of national Integration. Though democracy and caste system both oppose each other in their principle yet it is seen that casteism is gradually strengthening in modem democratic India. Casteism is a feeling that creates a favourable attitude towards one’s own caste and hatred towards other castes. Thus, casteism is blind loyalty towards one’s own caste.

In other words, when the consideration of superiority between the castes and the tendency to consider the interest of one’s own caste as opposed to other castes is called casteism. Among other causes social inequality, social distance, illiteracy conservatism, development in the means of transportation and communication etc. are responsible for casteism.

It is also seen that many political parties are formed on the basis of caste in India encouraging caste loyalties to win the elections, which creates ill- feeling among different castes and hence hampers national unity. India is not only a multi-ethnic and multi-religious but also a multi-linguistic society. India, therefore, has rightly been called a “veritable tower of babel”.

Eighteen languages are recognized as the major languages of India, linguisticians are not unanimous about the total Languages spoken in India. All the eighteen languages listed in the eighth schedule of the constitution with the exception of Sanskrit. Indian states are reorganized on the basis of language. The real problem in India is that no link language has yet evolved. Though Hindi has been constitutionally recognized as the national language to replace English, its enforcement as of India appears to be problematic.

Being motivated by a group blindly one who raises his voice against the other language is called linguism. It is an anti-linguistic attitude or feeling of people towards other languages and a positive feeling towards their own language. Regionalism is another problem which poses a problem to the federal infrastructure of Indian society. Owing to its vastness, India is divided in to a number of regions and the territory of each region is determined on the basis of language.

Regionalism as we mean is the love and loyalty towards own region. Even people of one region try to develop their own region even at the cost of other regions. At other times it is seen that this feeling does not allow people from other regions to work and settle in their region. Thus regionalism militates against nationalism and thereby impedes the process of national integration. Regionalism refers to the sub-nationalism demanding preference of the region as against the country as a whole.

In spite of these diversities, there are other diversifying factors which pose a problem for national unity. But behind all in Indian society, the idea of unity is not something new to India. The concept of one unified India has always been the fascinating idea of many great thinkers of this land.

Geographical unity:
India, though very large in size possesses geographical unity with natural boundaries. It is surrounded on one side by the great Himalayas and on the other side by the high seas. Religious thinkers political philosophers, poets, statements and kings have always conceived Bharat Varsha as expanding from the Himalayas in the north to Cape Cameron in the south and from the Brahmaputra in the east to the Indus in the west.

Religious unity:
Though India is a land of many religions, some say that the concept of the unity of India is essentially a religious one. Hinduism is the religion of the majority of people of India and provides a basis for unity. The same myths, legends and deities are shared by all the Hindus in spite of their sectarian differences. Epics like Ramayan, Mahabharat and Bhagabat Gita are read by every people.

pilgrimage centres like Badrinarayan, Rameswaram, Dwarika and Puri four comers speak the religious unity of this vast land. The rivers like Ganga, Jamuna, Godavari etc. are regarded as sacred for every Hindu. Each Indian regard each inch of this Bharat Varsha as sacred.

Cultural unity :
India possesses cultural unity which runs through every aspect of Indian social life. The art, literature, philosophy, customs, traditions etc, are typically Indian in character. Social institutions like the caste system and joint family system are found all over the country. Every Indian, whether he is a Hindu, a Muslim, a Sikh, or a Buddhist finds himself in a universe of caste. Similarly, festivals are observed all over the country with a very similar fashion.

Political unity :
Political unity is not new to India. The idea of bringing the whole country under one central authority has always been a preoccupation with great kings and statesmen in India. The concept of “Chakravarti” clearly refers to this idea of the political unification of India under one authority. The prevalence of religious practices like the Aswamedha Yajna only indicates the religious support extended to the idea of political unification of India under one central authority.

Emotional unity:
There is an emotional bond in India that binds all the inhabitants of the land. The very Name ‘Bharatmata’ brings all Indians emotionally closer to one another. From the above discussion, it is very clear that in India there is an undercurrent of unity running through the apparent diversity of race, religion, language, customs etc. India is thus a fine example of unity in diversity.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Long Answer Questions

Question 3.
Discuss the Religious Composition of Indian Society?
Answer:
India is a country, where the world’s almost all major religions are found. Here are Hindus, Islam, Christianity, Sikhism, Buddhism, Zoroastrianism and Animism. Again each of these main religions has a number of sects of its own. A real man of God i. e. a. true believer in religion is also expected to be a good human being, and indeed most of the time.

In Indian people seem to be more loyal to their respective religions than to their nation. This religious diversity has been a factor and a source of dis- unity and disharmony in the country. It is also a fact that religious difference was responsible for the development of the two-nation theory and the consequent partition of the country into India and Pakistan.

The partition of India neither solved the Muslim minority problem nor it has created a homogeneous population in India from a religious point of view. The religious differences in Indian society sometimes create communalism which results in loss of life and property and poses problems in the way of national integration. Let us look at the composition of Indian society from a religious point of view.

Hinduism:
Hinduism is the religion of the majority of the people of India. Some also say that Hinduism is not a religion but a way of life. Anyone can adopt the way of life provided by Hinduism, for a better life. Hinduism is the amalgamation of Indo- Aryan, Dravidian and Pre- Dravidian religious, elements. Nearly about 83% of the Indian population are Hindus.

Hindus (the Caste Hindus and scheduled caste) constitute an overwhelming majority which in percentages is about four times more than the total of all the other religious communities put together. In fact, even the aggregate and the percentage of the caste Hindus alone is singly bigger than that of all the rest. Hinduism is not a monolithic religion, it allows a number of possible conceptions of God and also a variety of alternative ways of attaining union with God.

This does not mean that there is nothing common among the Hindus. There are certain beliefs which are shared by all Hindus irrespective of the sects they belong to. For example, every Hindu believes in the immortality of the soul, transmigration of the soul, law of Karma, Dharma, Moksha, Maya etc. Hinduism as a religion of the majority of people provides a basis for national unity.

Hinduism unites more than two-thirds of the Indian population by means of common Gods, common beliefs, common festivals etc. Lingayat, Kabirpanthi, Sakta, Radhaswamy, Satnami, Brahmasamaj and a host of other sects are a number of sects of Hinduism.

Islam:
Islam is the religion of Muslims. Muslims constitute about 13% of India’s total population. In undivided, India Muslims constituted nearly 24% of the total population. Muslims living in India are more in number than in Pakistan. Today, India has the second-largest Muslim population in the world. Muslims entered India towards the end of the twelfth century A.D.

They spread and settled in India under the political patronage of Muslim rulers. The number of Muslims gradually swelled mainly due to conversions from Buddhism and Hinduism, Majority of the Indian Muslims are the descendants of converts. Therefore, they are not very different from their Hindu neighbours Muslims are mainly of two sects. They are the Sunni and the Shia.

Christianity:
Christians constitute more than 2% of the population in India. In Kerala, their population is about 25% of the state’s population. Christians are widely scattered all over the country. In northern India, Christianity is mainly confined to certain sections of the tribal population and depressed castes. There are mainly three sects in Christianity. They are

  • Romo- Syrians,
  • Roman Catholics,
  • Protestants.

Sikhism:
The Sikh population in India is around 2% which is mainly concentrated in Punjab. Sikhism was founded by Guru Nanak in the 16th century A.D. The Sikhs are ideologically nearer to the Hindus than to Muslims. The Sikhs can easily be identified by anyone, because of the five ‘K’s they always wear. The five ‘K’s are – Kesh, Kanga, Kaccha, Kera and Kripan.

Buddhism:
The founder of Buddhism is Gautam. Buddhism originated in India during the 6th century B.C. Buddhism enjoyed royal patronage for a long period beginning from the great emperor Ashoka in the 3rd century B.C. As a result, Buddhism spread not only in India but also in countries outside India. Practically Buddhism lost its influence, by the 1 Oth century A.D.

The Buddhists represent only less than 1 % of the total population. Its main creed is Ahimsa. The Buddhists are found in Maharashtra as a result of the recent conversions under the leadership of Dr Ambedkar. Buddhism has two sects, namely- Hinayana and the Mahayana.

Jainism:
Jainism was established by Lord Mahavir, in India during 6th century B.C. It represents only a small portion of the Indian population i.e. 0.45% of our population. Jainism is very close to Hinduism. Many of the Hindu doctrines are retained in it. They worship cows and enter into Hindu temples. Jains are mainly urban people and are found in the towns and cities of Punjab, U.P., Rajasthan, Gujarat and Maharashtra. Jains are divided in to three sects namely.

  • Digambaras,
  • Svetambaras,
  • Dhundias.

Zoroastrianism or Parsi:
The Parsis or the followers of Zoroaster of Zarathushtra came to India in the 7th century A.D. from Persia in order to escape the forcible conversions to Islam. They worship fire. They expose their dead on the so-called ‘towers of silence to be eaten up by vultures so that the elements- earth, fire and water are not defiled by the contact of the dead matter. They are about 0.3% in number and half of which live in the city of Bombay alone. They are mainly urban and are on the top of the economic ladder of India.

Animism :
Animism is a tribal faith. It is a very primitive religion, according to which man is believed to be surrounded by a number of impersonal ghostly powers. These powers are said to reside in rocks, rivers, trees stones etc. In India, there are about 2 5 million people who believe in Animism.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Long Answer Questions

Question 4.
Discuss the Racial composition of Indian Society?
Answer:
Indian society is a multi-ethnic, multi-religious, multi-linguistic and multi-racial society. Its people worship differently. Its people have different faiths and different ideologies. The Indian society, the vast population is composed of people having diverse creeds, customs and colours. Let us see the racial composition of Indian society. A.W. Green says that “A race is a large biological human grouping with a number of distinctive inherited characteristics which vary within a certain range.

Similarly, A.L. Krober says that “A race is a valid biological concept. It is a group united by heredity, a breed or genetic strain or a sub-species. The Indian sub-continent received a large number of migratory races mostly from the western and eastern directions. Observing C.B. Memoria remarks that the “Indian population contains many primitive strains of mankind not found elsewhere to the same extent.

Different scholars have described the racial composition of Indian society. The first racial classification of the Indian population on scientific lines is probably of Sir Herbert Risely. He classified the Indian population into seven types. They are

  • Turko – Iranian
  • Indo-Aryan
  • Scytho-Dravidian
  • Arya-Dravidian
  • Mongolo-Dravidian
  • Mongoloid
  • Dravidian

Turko- Iranian:
People having this strain in their blood are mainly found in Beluchisthan and Afghanistan, which are now outside the political borders of India.

Indo- Aryan:
Indo- Aryan strain is mainly found in east Punjab, Raj as than and Kashmir, especially among the people belonging to the castes of Rajput, Khatri and Jat.

Scythe- Dravidian :
Scythe – Dravidian is a mixed racial type of Scythians and Dravidians. People having this racial ancestry are said to be found in Saurashtra, Coorg, and the hilly tracts of Madhya Pradesh. It is said that the upper strata people are of Scythians while the lower strata people are dominated by Dravidians.

Arya- Dravidian :
Arya- Dravidian racial type is an admixture of Indo- Aryan and Dravidian elements. The Aryan elements is more pronounced among the upper castes, especially Brahmins. The Dravidian element is more prominent among the Harijans and other lower-caste people.

Mongol – Dravidian:
Mongols- Dravidian racial type is the intermixture of the Dravidian and Mongolian races. The Brahmins and Kayasthas of Bengal and Odisha are believed to belong to this race.

Mongoloid:
Mongoloid racial element is mainly found among the tribal people of North-East Frontier and Assam.

Dravidian:
The people of south India and Madhya Pradesh are claimed to be of this stock. Most of anthropologists are not ready to accept the racial classification of Risley. D. N. Mazumdar says that the ‘Dravidian’ like the term ‘Aryan’ is a linguistic classification and not a racial classification. A.C. Haddon gives his own classification dis- regarding the classification of Risley.

According to him the principal races are

  • The Pre- Dravidian
  • The Dravidian
  • The Indo-Aryan
  • The Indo-Alpine
  • The Mongolian

J.N. Hutton also describes about the composition of the Indian population. But it is Dr B.S. Guha, after having revised the earlier classification has presented his own list of races that are believed to have composed the Indian population. His classifications are

The Negrito:
The presence of Negrito race in India is a controversial issue among anthropologists who say the presence of Negrito race say that they are relatively in pure form are still found in Andaman Island and also among some South Indian tribal people. Keeping these facts in view the protagonists of this view believe that the earliest occupants of India were Negritos, who were later displaced by Proto- Australoid.

But the antagonists of this view say that there is no weighty evidence to prove conclusively the existence ofNegrito element in the Indian population. So it may be safely said that Negrito race though existed in past, has left little trace in India today.

The Proto- Austroloid:
Indian tribal population is by and large dominated by this racial element. The Santals, the Juangs, the Koreas, the Soares, the Parjas, the Khonds, the Chenchus are a few of the many tribes of this race.

The Mongoloid:
The Mongoloid race came to India from Northwestern China, via- Tibet. People of this racial element are mainly found in North-Eastern India. This race consists of two fundamental types. They are

Palaeo- Mongoloid:
The Palaeo- Mongoloid consists of a long-headed type and of broad-headed type.

Tibeto- Monogoloid :
The people of Sikkim and Bhutan are said to belong to the Tibeto-Mongoloid race.

The Mediterranian:
The Mediterranian race is divided into three types. They are

Palaeo – Mediterranian:
This racial type is represented by the Tamil and Telugu Brahmins of the South.

The Mediterranian:
People of this racial type are believed to be the builders of the Indus valley civilization.

Oriental:
This race is very much similar to the Mediterranean type. The Mediterranean race as a whole, once a predominant race all over India, is now mainly concentrated in the south.

Western Brachycephals:
Western- Brachycephal race entered India from the west. The Alpinoid, the Dinaric and the Armenoid are the three main types of this race.

Alpinoid:
The people of Saurashtra, Gujarat and also Bengal are said to have of this race.

Dinaric:
This strain is claimed to be found among the people of Odisha, Bengal and Coorg.

Armenoid:
The Parsis of Bombay are believed to be the true representatives of this racial type.

Nordic Race :
People belonging to the Nordic race came to India from the North and spread all over Northern India during the 2nd millennium B.C. The people of this stock are believed to have enriched Indian culture by contributing new ideas to its philosophy and literature. From the above-discussed races, the first three races namely the Proto-Austroloid and the Mongoloid and Negrito constitute the Indian tribal population, while the other three races namely the Mediterranian, the Alpo- Dinaric and the Nordic, constitute the general population of India.

From the above discussion, it is very clear that the Indian population is composed of almost all the important races of the world. Today, there is no such race in India which is completely pure. All the races have got inter- mixed with one another. The intermixture of race is thorough that even in the same family we find one brother is quite fair while the other is quite dark. So India is rightly called a “Museum of races” or a “Melting pot of races”.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Long Answer Questions

Question 5.
India is a ‘Spectacle of Museum of tongues’- Explain. Or. Discuss the linguistic composition of Indian society?
Answer:
India is not only a multi-ethnic and multi-religious but also a polyglot society. Apart from English which is one of the major languages of administration, law higher academic teaching and research, Journalism and inter-regional communication, eighteen languages are recognized as the major languages of India. Linguists are not unanimous about the total number of languages spoken in India. Various enumerations are given in support of different criteria.

Dr George Grierson in the ‘Linguistic Survey of India’ tests 179 major languages and 544 dialects. The Linguistic Survey of India conducted in the first decade of this century recorded that “Language changes every 20 miles in India.” While the 1931 census lists more than 200 languages dialects, the 1961 census registered 1652 spoken languages of which 1549 were indigenous to India. Of these, about 572 covered almost 90% of the total population.

The multiplicity of languages creates new social cleavages in the already divided population of India by caste and creed. In the words of A.R. Desai, “India presents a spectacle of the museum of tongues.” Some also say that India is a ‘Veritable tower of babe. ’ We all know that all the eighteen languages listed in the Eighth Schedule of the constitution with the exception of Sanskrit. By 1966 partly by design and partly by the accident of political action, the linguistic formula acquired legitimacy as the primary criterion of state re¬organization in India.

These numerous Indian languages can however be grouped into four different speech families. They are

  • Indo-Aryan
  • The Dravidian
  • TheAustric
  • The Sino- Tibetan

Indo- Aryan Languages:
Hindi is the most important language, of all the languages belonging to the Indo- Aryan speech family. The Indian constitution recognizes Hindi as the national language which eventually is to replace English as the official link language on the lingua franca of India Hindi along with other allied languages like Hindusthani, Urdu, and Punjabi is claimed to be the mother tongue of 46.3% of India’s total population.

The people inhabiting the great Indo- Gangetic plains in Northern India speak this language in one form or the other. The other Indo-Aryan languages are Assamese, Bengali, Odia, Gujarathi, Marathi, and Kashmiri. These languages are spoken by the people of the states named after these languages. Hindi, unlike Urdu, borrowed words from Sanskrit and used Devanagari as its script. Hindi and Urdu were together known as Hindustani till 1947. These two languages are very similar in their spoken form, though they greatly differ in their written form.

At present Hindi is progressively being Sanskritized by dropping Persian words and incorporating itself more and more Sanskrit words. Punjabi is the language of mainly Sikh religious minorities. Though it resembles Hindi in its spoken form, it differs from it in its written form. Urdu freely borrowed a large number of words from the Persian language. It also adopted the Persian script as its own.

Dravidian Languages:
Tamil, Telugu, Kannada and Malayalam, the four southern languages belonging to the Dravidian speech family. Tamil is the language spoken by the people of Tamil Nadu who constitute 8.2% of our population. Telugu is the language of the people of Andhra Pradesh. It represents 10.2% of the total population of India and as such form the second-largest linguistic group in India after Hindi. The people of Karnataka speak Kannada, which constitutes 4.5% of the total population. Malayalam is the language spoken by the Keralites form 4.1% of our population.

Austria – Languages:
Most of the languages and dialects are spoken by the tribes of Central India belong to the Austric speech family.

Sino- Tibetan Languages :
The languages and dialects of North- Eastern tribal population are mainly of the Sino- Tibetan speech family. Nearly 3.2% of India’s total population speak one or the other of the 23 tribal languages belonging to either the Austric or the Sino-Tibetan speech families. At present India is divided into states along linguistic lines for the simple reason that most of these major languages are localized in different parts of the country.

While each language tends to concentrate in a particular part of the country, there is much overlapping of two or more languages, especially in areas near the borders. Therefore there are linguistic minorities in each of the linguistic states as well as in big cities. Viewing such linguistic composition of Indian society an American specialist in Indian languages says that villagers in the locality may find it difficult to understand the speech of their relatives living a hundred miles away from them.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Long Answer Questions

Question 6.
Discuss the Tribal composition of Indian society?
Answer:
India is claimed to have the largest total tribal population compared to any other single country in the world. The tribal population in India constitutes nearly 7% of the total population. The vast tribal population in India is not a homogeneous group. Rather it is composed of different tribes. According to the scheduled tribe’s list modification order 1956, there are 414 tribes in India. All these tribes are classified into different groups on various bases like geographical location, language, race and levels of economic and social development.

1. On the basis of geographical location:
On the band of geographical or territorial location tribes are divided into three main zones, namely

The North-North Eastern zone :
Eastern Kashmir, Eastern Punjab, Himachal Pradesh, North Uttar Pradesh, Nagaland, Assam etc. constitute this zone. The Aka, Mishmi, Chulikata, and Naga are some of the tribes of this zone.

Central Zone:
Bihar, Bengal, Southern, U.P., Southern Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh and Odishacome are under this zone. The Savara, the Khond, the Santhal, the Bhil, the Gond, the Muria and the Bangla etc. live in this zone.

Southern Zone:
The Southern zone is comprised of the four Southern states, namely Andhra Pradesh, Tamilnadu, Karnataka and Kerala. The Toda, the Chenchu, the Kedar etc. are some of the important tribes of this zone.

Classification on the basis of Language:
The languages of the tribes of the three zones belong to three different speech families namely

Sino- Tibetan linguistic group :
Most of the tribes of the North- North- Eastern zone speak Sino- Tibetan languages in one form or other.

Austro- Asiatic linguistic group:
The dialects and languages spoken by most of the central zone belong to the Austric speech family. But some of the important tribes of this region like the Gonds and the Khonds speak languages having an affinity with the Dravidian speech family.

Dravidian Linguistic groups:
Tribal people in the Southern Zone in one form on other the Dravidian languages. Telugu, Tamil, Kannada and Malayalam.

Classification on the Basis of Race:
Indian tribes are broadly classified into three racial groups. They are.

The Mongoloid:
The North- North – Eastern zone tribes, in habiting the Himalayan regions belong to the one on the other type of Mongoloid race.

The Proto- Austroloid :
The central Indian tribes are mainly found to be Proto- Austroloid in their physical features.

The Negrito:
A few tribes like the Kadar of the extreme South and the Andamanese are said to be of this racial origin.

On the basis of cultural development:
Dr Elvin has classified Indian tribes into four classes on the basis of their levels of cultural development and contact with the plains.

Class -I:
The members of the tribes of class 1 are more or less isolated, and primitive, lead a communal life and cultivate with axes.

Class – II:
The people belonging to class – II are more individualistic, less simple, less honest, more used to outside life and less occupied with axe cultivation than the members of class-1 tribes.

Class – III:
People of this category are most exposed to external influence and they represent the largest section of the Indian tribal population. These people are already on the way of losing their tribal culture, religion and social organization as a result of external influences.

Class -IV:
The Bills and Nagas are members of this class of tribes. Dr Elvin believes that these people are the representatives of the old aristocracy of the country. Madan and Mazumdar have clarified the tribal communities into three main groups exclusively on the basis of cultural distance maintained from the rural-urban groups. The first group of tribes are culturally far away from the rural-urban groups. It includes all those tribes which have not come in contact with rural-urban groups in any significant way.

The second group consists of tribes which are in active contact with and under the direct influence of the outside rural-urban groups. As a consequence, these tribal communities are experiencing discomfort and problems. The third group consists of those tribes that have come into contact with the rural-urban groups but have not suffered from it. That is to say, these tribes have been successfully acculturated into the rural-urban way of life.

The tribal Welfare- Committee has suggested a classification of Indian tribes into four classes.
Tribal Communities:
These communities are by and large confined to their forest habitat and still lead a primitive way of life.

Semi-Tribal Communities:
The communities have come out of their forest habitat to settle in the rural areas and have taken up agricultural and other allied occupations.

Acculturate Tribal Communities:
These are the communities which have migrated to urban and semi-urban centres and have taken up occupations in modem industries and other works. They also have adopted many of the cultural traits of modem society.

Totally Assimilated Tribal Communities:
These are the tribes which have totally got assimilated into the modem way of life. An attempt has been made by Madan and Mazumdar to make a classification of Indian tribes on the basis of economic development. The first category of tribes are mainly dependent on forests for their livelihood and their economy is food gathering.

The tribes of the second category are those whose economy falls midway between food gathering and primitive agriculture. The economy of the third category is mainly agriculture but is supplemented by forest produce whenever and wherever possible. Finally, there is a new economic category of tribal men which is coming up in India with the growth of Industry. This new economic category includes those tribes who have been driven out of their traditional occupations and habitat and are employed in modern industry.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Short Answer Questions

Odisha State Board CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Solutions Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Short Answer Questions.

CHSE Odisha 12th Class Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Short Answer Questions

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is Unity?
Answer:
Unity means integration where in hitherto divisive people and culture are synthesized into a united whole. It connotes a sense of oneness, a sense of oneness. It stands for the bonds which hold the members of a society together.

Question 2.
What is diversity?
Answer:
Diversity means difference, however, means something more than more difference. It means collective differences that is differences which mark off one group of people from other. These differences may be biological, religious linguistic, etc.

Question 3.
Mention two factors of diversity.
Answer:
Mention two factors of diversity

  • Racial Diversity
  • Linguistic Diversity

Question 4.
Mention two factors of Unity.
Answer:

  • Geographical Unity
  • Religious Unity

5. Define race.
Answer:
A. W. Green says A race as a large biological human grouping with a number of distinctive inherited characteristics which vary within a certain range.

Question 6.
What is Racial Diversity?
Answer:
India is a museum of different races. Herbert Rosely had classified the people of India into seven racial types. These are Turko- Indian, Indo- Aryan, Scytho Dravidian Aryo – Dravidian, Mangolo Dravidian Mongolid and Dravidian.

Question 7.
What is Linguistic Diversity?
Answer:
According to A. R. Desai India presents as a spectacle of a museum of tongues. The famous linguist given dismissive noted that India has 179 languages and 544 dialects.

Question 8.
What is Religious Diversity?
Answer:
India is a land of many religions. There are also followers of various faiths particularly of Hinduism, Islam, Christianity, Buddhism, Jainism, and Zoroastrianism among others, etc.

Question 9.
Caste Diversity?
Answer:
Indis is a country of castes. The caste as peculiar to Indian society. There are more than 3,000 castes or Jati in India. These are hierarchically graded on different ways on different regions.

Question 10.
Geographical Unity?
Answer:
From very early times, India has been visualized as one nation covering the whole landmass from the Himalayan to the ocean on the other sides. The Aryan thinkers and other philosophers named this landmass as Bharatvarsha.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Short Answer Questions

Question 11.
Religious Unity?
Answer:
Although India as a land of many religious religions has been one of the basis of national unity. As Srinivas says. The concept of the unity of India is essentially a religious one Hinduism being the religion of the majority of the people of India provides a basis for unity.

Question 12.
Cultural Unity?
Answer:
India has cultural unity. The fundamental approaches to art, philosophy and literature and typically Indian on the character. Social institutions like the caste system and the joint family are found all over India which are once again typically Indian.

Question 13.
Political Unity?
Answer:
India has also political unity. Political unity in India as the product of cultural and religious unity. The Idea of being the whole country under one central authority as not new to Indians.

Question 14.
Emotional Unity?
Answer:
The emotional bond that binds all the inhabitants of this vast land. The very same Bharat Mata emotionally brings all Indians together. Although linguistic diversity poses a threat to emotional integration.

Question 15.
Tribal Composition of Ridia?
Answer:
The tribal population in India constitutes nearly 7% of the total population India is cleaned to have the largest total tribal population compared to any other single country on the world.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Short Answer Questions

Question 16.
Geographical Unity?
Answer:
From very early time India has been visualized as one nation covering the whole landmass from the Himalayans to the ocean on the other sides. The Aryan thinkers and other philosophers named this landmass as Bharat Varsha. The term Bharat Varsha i.e., India has always referred to this vast expense of the land expanding from the Himalayas in North to the cap camo rain on the south and from the Brahmaputra on the East to the Indus the west. These national boundaries given the land geographical unity.

Question 17.
Religious Unity?
Answer:
Although India is land of many religious religions has been one of the basis of national unity. As Srinivas says. The concept of the unity of India is monolithic essentially religious one Hinduism the religion of the majority of the people of India. Provides a basis for unity. It is a fact that Hinduism is not a religion, There are number seats of in Hinduism. But they have some faith in common with slight variation.

Question 18.
Cultural Unity?
Answer:
India has cultural unity. The fundamental approaches to art philosophy and literature are typically Indian in the character. Social institutions like the caste system and the joint family are found all over India which are once again topically Indian. Caste is such a social institution in India that every Indian whether a Hindu, a Muslim or a Christian finds himself a universe of caste. The common social institutions and cultural traditions foster unity among the Indians.

Question 19.
Political Unity?
Answer:
India has also political unity, political unity in India in the product of cultural and religious unity. The idea of bringing the whole country under one central authority is not new to Indians. Unification of vast area and populations under one rule has been the highest goal of the things and statesmen. The ancient Indian political unification of the whole land.

Many great things right from Dilip, Yayati, Mandhata and Yudhistira to Chandragupta Maurya, Ashoka and Samudra Gupta of later period had established theory sovereignty all most all over India the country and achieved the distinction of being a Chakravarti or universal overlord.

Question 20.
Emotional Unity?
Answer:
The emotional bond that binds all the inhabitants of this vast land. The very name Bharat Mata emotionality brings all Indians together. Although linguistic diversity poses a threat to emotional integration. Sanskrit belongs the mother of all Indian languages and serves as a significant unifying bond in the emotional integration of the people.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Short Answer Questions

Question 21.
What do you mean by Unity in diversity?
Answer:
Unity means integration. Where in hitherto divisive people and culture are synthesized into a united whole. It connotes a sense of oneness, a sense of we-ness. It stands for the bonds which hold the members of a society together. There is a difference between unity and uniformity, uniformity presupposes similarly, but unity does not.

Unity may be bom out of similarity. It many or many not be based in uniformity. Diversity means difference it however means something more than more difference. It means collective differences that as a difference which mark off one group of people from other.

Question 22.
Discuss various religions in India?
Answer:
Different religions have coexisted in India in past centuries. The history of our religious movements have been such that out us incorporated diverse faiths and values. Religion has been, on the one hand, the basis of national unity. On the other hand, religious diversity has been a factor of disunity and disharmony in out severity. India as a country where all the world’s major religions are found. In India are come across Hindus, Buddhists, Jains, Zeroastorms, Sikhs, Muslims and Christians etc.

Question 23.
Racial Composition?
Answer:
A race as a biological human grouping with a number of distinctive physical characteristics. A group of people are distinguished from other groups of people on the basis of physical characteristics such as completion height and shape of face etc. A such distinctive group of human beings is each called a race. These races are Aryan, Dravidian, Austroheld and Mongoloid, etc.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Short Answer Questions

Question 24.
Linguistic Groups?
Answer:
A says, A.R. Desai. India presents a spectacle of the museum of tongues. According to the 1951 census, there are 845 different languages and dialects spoken in India. But the actual number is estimated to be around 1000, George Grierson, in his linguistic. Survey of spoken alone in North India. While a few of these languages are spoken by crores of people a large number of them have less than a hundred thousand speakers each. All these Indian languages and dialects can be grouped into four speech families mainly.

  • Indo-Aryan,
  • Dravidian,
  • Austria, and
  • Sino – Tibetan, etc.

Question 25.
Tribal Groups?
Answer:
The tribes of India form an important part of the total population. The tribal population in India constitutes about 7% of the Indian population. India has the largest total tribal population compared to any other country in the world. The large tribal population of India is not a homogeneous group.

It is composed of a number of different tribes – our constitution recognized 212 tribes and these tribes are found in different parts of the country. According to the scheduled Tribes’ last modification order in 1956, there are 414 tribes in India. The tribes of India are classified into different groups on the basis of geographical location, language, race, and levels of socioeconomic development.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

Odisha State Board CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Solutions Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions and Answers.

CHSE Odisha 12th Class Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

Multiple Choice Questions With Answers

Question 1.
Does unity mean _____?
(a) Integration
(b) difference
(c) Uniformity
(d) Above all
Answer:
(a) Integration

Question 2.
Does diversity mean _____?
(a) Integration
(b) Difference
(c) Uniformity
(d) None of the above all
Answer:
(b) Difference

Question 3.
Which of the following forms of Diversity?
(a) Racial Diversity
(b) Linguistic Diversity
(c) Religious Diversity
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 4.
Which of the following Bonds of Unity?
(a) Geographical Unity
(b) Religious Unity
(c) Cultural Unity
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 5.
A Race is a ____?
(a) Biological human grouping
(b) A human grouping
(c) Complexion
(d) Above all
Answer:
(a) Biological human grouping

Question 6.
Who says that race is a valid Biological concept? it is a group united by heredity a breed or genetic strain or a subspecies?
(a) A.L. Krober
(b) FrazzBoas
(c) A. W. Green
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) A. L. Krober

Question 7.
Who says that In common parlance when we speak of race, we mean of a group of people that have certain blindly and perhaps also mental characteristics in common”?
(a) A.L. Krober
(b) FrazzBoas
(c) A. W. Green
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Frazz Boas

Question 8.
Who says that “A race is a biological human grouping with a member of distinctive inherited characteristics which vary within a certain range”?
(a) A. L. Krober
(b) FrazzBoas
(c) A. W. Green
(d) Above all
Answer:
(c) A. W. Green

Question 9.
Which of the following HerbertRistey’s Racial classification?
(a) The Turko Iranian
(b) Indo Aryan
(c) saythodravidian
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 10.
Which of the following classification of A.C. Haddon?
(a) the pre-Dravidian Jungle tribes
(b) the Dravidians who are long-headed and brunette
(c) the Indo-Aryans who are fair-complexioned and long-headed
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

Question 11.
Which of the following is the classification of B.S Guha in the race?
(a) The Proto-Australoid
(b) Monogoloid
(c) TheTibetomongoloid
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 12.
Which of the following religious composition of India?
(a) Hinduism
(b) Islam
(c) Christians
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 13.
Which of the following are the linguistic Groups of India?
(a) Indo-Aryan
(b) Dravidriari
(c) A Rastrick
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 14.
Which of the following are the tribal groups in India?
(a) North-North Eastern zone
(b) Central Zone
(c) Southern Zone
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 15.
Which of the following the classification on the basis of language?
(a) The Sino Tibetan
(b) Austric Linguistic group
(c) The Dravidian Linguistic Group
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 16.
Which of the following the classification on the basis of race?
(a) The Mongoloid
(b) The Australoid
(c) TheNegreto
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 17.
Which of the following the classification on the basis of the socioeconomic level of Development?
(a) class-I
(b) class-II
(c) class -III
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 18.
Which of the following classification of Indian tribes?
(a) Tribal Communities
(b) Semi- Tribal Communities
(c) Accultarated Tribal Communities
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 19.
Who says that “Race refers to human stocks that are genetically distinguished to major physiological difference to a remote separation of ancestry”?
(a) Maclver
(b) A.W. Green
(c) D.N.Majumdar
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) Maclver

Question 20.
Who says that “If a group of people who by their possession of a member of common physical traits can be distinguished from others, even of the members of this biological groups are widely scattered they form a race”?
(a) A. W. Green
(b) Maclver
(c) A.L. Krober
(d) D. N. Majumdar.
Answer:
(d) D.N. Majumdar

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

Question 21.
Which of the following classification ofJ.H. Hutton?
(a) Negritos
(b) Proto-Australoid
(c) Pre-Dravidiran
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 22.
The 1961 census shows nearly of the Indian population as Hindusim?
(a) 86%
(b) 84%
(c) 85%
(d) 90%
Answer:
(b) 84%

Question 23.
Which of the following classification of tribes on the basis of geographical location?
(a) North-North Eastern Zone
(b) Central Zone
(c) Southern Zone
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 24.
Which of the following the classification ofB.S.Guha?
(a) The Negritos
(b) The Proto Australoids
(c) TheMongoids
(d) Above all
Answer:
(d) Above all

Question 25.
Who says that Persia as the land of light Greece the land of grace India- the land of dreams, Rome the land of empire, doubt India is the land of dreams – a dream that strives to blend inextricably her various similarities and differences?
(a) Hegel
(b) Guha
(c) Huddem
(d) None of above
Answer:
(a) Hegel

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

One Word Answers

Question 1.
unity mean ________?
Answer:
Unity means integration

Question 2.
Diversity means _________?
Answer:
Diversity means difference

Question 3.
Mentions one forms of Diversity in India?
Answer:
Racial Diversity

Question 4.
Mentions one Bonds of Unity in India?
Answer:
Geographical Unity

Question 5.
Mentions one racial composition of Indian Society?
Answer:
The Tunku Iranian.

Question 6.
Mentions one religion’s composition?
Answer:
Hinduism

Question 7.
Mentions one linguistic Group?
Answer:
Dravidian Languages.

Question 8.
Mentions one tribal Group?
Answer:
North-North Eastern Zone.

Question 9.
Mentions one on the basis of language?
Answer:
The Sino-Tibetan

Question 10.
Mentions one on the basics of Race?
Answer:
The Mongoloid

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

Question 11.
Mentions one classification on the basis of the socio-economic level of Development?
Answer:
The tribes of class-I

Question 12.
Mentions one of the classifications of Haddon, race?
Answer:
The Pre-Dravidian.

Question 13.
Mention one classification of the J.H. button of race?
Answer:
Mongoloids.

Question 14.
Mention one of the Dr B.S. Guha of race ________?
Answer:
The Negrito.

Question 15.
Mention one of the classification of tribes on the basis of geographical location?
Answer:
North – North – Eastern zone.

Question 16.
Mention one contributing to the unity of India?
Answer:
Religious Unity

Question 17.
Does mention 1971 census show a total languages spoken in India?
Answer:
1108

Question 18.
Who says that A race as a large biological human grouping with a number of distinctive inherited characteristics which very within a certain range?
Answer:
A. W. Green

Question 19.
Who said that Race reforms to human stocks that are genetically distinguished to major physiological differences to a remote separation of ancestry?
Answer:
Maclver

Question 20.
Who says that race as a valid biological concept? It is a group united by hereditary, a breed or genetic strain or a sub-species?
Answer:
A. L. Krober

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

Question 21.
Who says that “If a group of people who by their possession of a number of common physical traits can be distinguished from others, even of the members of thus biological group are widely scattered they form a race”?
Answer:
D.N. Majumdar.

Correct The Sentences

1. Unity means difference?
Answer:
Unity means integration.

2. Diversity means integration?
Answer:
Diversity means difference.

3. India is a museum of the different region?
Answer:
India is a museum of different race?

4. A. R. Desai India presents a spectacle of the museum of tongues?
Answer:
right of all

5. A. L. Krober says The sale a large group of people is intensified by inherited physical differences?
Answer:
BiesazandBiesanz

6. A. W. Green says A race as a biological concept. It is a group united by heredity a breed or genetic strown or sub-species?
Answer:
A.L. Kroeber says a race is a biological concept It is a group united by hereditary a breed or genetic strain or subspecies.

7. Biesaz and Biesanz say in common when we speak of race, are mean of group of people that have certain bodily and perhaps also mental characteristics on common?
Answer:
Frazz Boas says in common parlance when we speak of race we mean of a group of people that have certain bodily and perhaps also mental characteristics in common.

8. A. L. Krober A race as a biological human grouping with a number or distinctive inherited characteristics which very which a certain range?
Answer:
A. W. Green A race as a biological human group with a number of distinctive inherited characteristics which vary within a certain range.

9. A race is a psychological human grouping with a number of distinctive physical characteristics?
Answer:
A race is a biological human grouping with a number of distinctive physical characteristics.

10. India is a Tower port of races?
Answer:
India as a melting pot of races.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

11. A. R. Desai presents a spectacle of the museum of tongues?
Answer:
Right

12. Animism as a Hinduism faith?
Answer:
Animism is atribal faith.

13. Joins the followers of lord Mahavira?
Answer:
Right

14. Sikhism is founded by Mahama?
Answer:
Sikhism is founded by Guru Nanak.

15. Zoroastrians are followers of Zoroaster?
Answer:
Right

16. Budhism emerged on India during the 7th century B.C Gautam?
Answer:
Buddism emerged in India during the 6th century B.C. Gautam.

17. Islam as the religion of Muslims. Did it extend in India towards the end of the 10th century A.D?
Answer:
Islam as the religion of Muslims. It extended in India towards the end of the 12th century A.D.

18. Muslim in India constitute nearly 12% of the total population?
Answer:
Muslims in India constitutes nearly 10% of the total population.

19. Christians constitute more than 5% of the Indian population?
Answer:
Christians constitute more than 2% of the Indian Population.

20. Tribal population in India constitutes about 10% of the Indian population?
Answer:
The tribal population in India constitutes about 7% of the Indian population.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

21. Constitutions recognize 210 tribes and these tribes are found in different parts of the country?
Answer:
Constitutions recognize 212 tribes and these tribes are found in different points of the country.

22. Scheduled Tribes’ last modification order 1956, therefore 414 tribes in India?
Answer:
Right

Fill In The Blanks.

1. Unity means ______.
Answer: Integration

2. Diversity means ______.
Answer: difference

3. India is a ______ of different races.
Answer: Museum

4. A. R. Desai India presents a spectacle of ______ of tongues.
Answer: Museum

5. India is a _____ of many religions.
Answer: Lord

6. India is a country of ______.
Answer: Castes

7. A race is a _____ human grouping with a number of distinctive physical characteristics.
Answer: biological

8. race is a valid ______ concept.
Answer: biological

9. _____ religions have coexisted in India in part centuries.
Answer: Different

10. Zoroastrians are followers of _______.
Answer: Zoroaster

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

11. Sikhism was founded by _______.
Answer: GuruNanak

12. Jains the followers of ______.
Answer: LordMahavir

13. Buddhism emerged in India during ______ Century B.C. Gautam.
Answer: 6th

14. Christians Constitute more than _____ of the Indian population.
Answer: 2%

15. Muslim in India Constitute nearly ______ of the total population.
Answer: 10%

16. Islam is the ______ of Muslims.
Answer: Religious

17. Majority of the people of India are ______.
Answer: Hindus.

18. A.R. Desai India presents a ______ of the museum of tongues.
Answer: Spectacle

19. Tribal population in India constitutes about 7% of the ______ population.
Answer: Indian

20. Our Constitution recognizes 212 tribes and these tribes are founded in different parts of the ______.
Answer: Country

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Sociology Unit 1 Introducing Indian Society Objective Questions

21. Tribes Cast modification order 1956 there are _______ tribes in India.
Answer: 414

22. Varrier Elvira has classified Indian tribes into ______classes.
Answer: Four

BSE Odisha 7th Class English Solutions Test-1

Odisha State Board BSE Odisha 7th Class English Solutions Test-1 Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

BSE Odisha Class 7 English Solutions Test-1

BSE Odisha 7th Class English Test-1 Text Book Questions and Answers

The figures in the right hand margin indicates the marks for each question.
1. Write the following Odia names of the persons in English. [10]
(Teacher will give names of ten persons in Odia)

BSE Odisha 7th Class English Solutions Test-1 Q1
ମହାତ୍ମା ଗାନ୍ଧୀ – Mahatma Gandhi
ମଧୁସୂଦନ ଦାସ – Madhusudan Das
ବିଜୁ ପଟ୍ଟନାୟକ – Biju Pattnaik
ବିନାପାନି ମହନ୍ତ – Binapani Mohantv
ଗୋପାବନ୍ଧୁ ଦାଶ – Gopabandhu Dash
ଗୋପୀନାଥ ମହନ୍ତ – Gopinath Mohantv
ଫାକିରମୋହନ ସେନାପତି – Fakirmohan Senapati
ରାଧନାଥ ରୋଭ – Radhanath Rov
ରାଜେନ୍ଦ୍ର ପ୍ରସାଦ – Rajendra Prasad
ଚିତ୍ତରଂଜନ ଦାସ – Chittaranjan Das

2. Write the following names of places in English. [10]
(Teacher will give names of ten places in Odia)

BSE Odisha 7th Class English Solutions Test-1 Q2
Answer:
ଭୁବନେଶ୍ୱର – Bhubaneswar
ଦିଲ୍ଲୀ – Delhi
ଆହ୍ଲାବାଦ – Allahabad
ବାଲାସୋର – Balasore
ଆନନ୍ଦପୁର – Anandpur
ବରିପଡା – Baripada
ଗୌହାଟୀ – Gauhati
ଚେନ୍ନାଇ – Chennai
ଫିରୋଜାବାଦ – Ferozabad
ଚମ୍ପୁଆ – Champua

BSE Odisha 7th Class English Solutions Test-1

3. Your teacher will give dictation of ten English words. Write them in the space given below. [10]

BSE Odisha 7th Class English Solutions Test-1 Q3
Answer:
rooster
monkey
money
protect
desert
teacher
wealth
singer
bottle
driver

4. Given below are some words. Your teacher will read aloud ten of them. Tick those which s/he reads aloud.
city, country, tree, crown, rooster, close, monkey, jackal, animal, camel, thirsty, climb, zoo, trumpet [10]
Answer:
(Student tick the words which their teacher reads aloud.)

5. Your teacher will read aloud a paragraph (The Jackal and the Rooster). You listen to him/her and fill in the gaps
There was a very ___________ and ___________ rooster. It looked like a __________ with a beautiful red __________. It also felt like a __________ in the morning. It sat on a ___________ place and ____________ non-stop cock-koo-doodle-doo. He knew his _____________ was much better than the songs of ____________. [15]
Answer:
There was a very big and handsome rooster. It looked like a king with a beautiful read crown. It also felt like a king. It gets up very early in the morning. It sat on a high place and sang non-stop cock-koo-doodle-doo. He knew his song was much better than the songs of other roosters of his locality.

BSE Odisha 7th Class English Solutions Test-1

6. Match the pairs of words which sound alike at the end part. Write the serial numbers in boxes. [15]

BSE Odisha 7th Class English Solutions Test-1

Answer:

A B
1. Pool Farm (10)
2. Trees Keeper (8)
3. Sun Sky (4)
4. High Away (9)
5. You Zoo (6)
6.Too Turn (3)
7. Learn Breeze (2)
8. Soldier Run (7)
9. Day True (5)
10. Arm Cool (2)

7. Read the poem and answer the questions that follow. [10]
(କବିତାଟି ପଢ଼ ଏବଂ ପରବର୍ତ୍ତୀ ପ୍ରଶ୍ନଗୁଡିକର ଉତ୍ତର ଦିଅ ।)

A fox was moving on one day,
And just above his head,
He saw a vine with lovely grapes,
Rich ripe and purple-red.

Question (i).
What is the poem about?
(କବିତାଟି କେଉଁ ବିଷୟରେ ?)
Answer:
The poem is about a fox and vine with lovely grapes.

Question (ii).
What was the fox doing one day?
(ଦିନେ କୋକିଶିଆଳ କ’ଣ କରୁଥିଲା ?)
Answer:
The fox was moving here and there one day.

BSE Odisha 7th Class English Solutions Test-1

Question (iii).
What did he see above his head?
(ତା’ ମୁଣ୍ଡ ଉପରେ ସେ କ’ଣ ଦେଖୁଲା ?)
Answer:
He saw a vine with lovely grapes above his head.

Question (iv).
What were the grapes like? (ଅଙ୍ଗୁରଗୁଡ଼ିକ କିପରି ଥିଲା ?)
Answer:
The grapes were rich, ripe and purple red.

Question (v).
‘He’ in the third line is used for___________.
(ତୃତୀୟ ଧାଡ଼ି ‘He’ (ସେ) _________________ ପାଇଁ ବ୍ୟବହାର ହୋଇଛି ।)
Answer:
In the third line ‘He’ is used for the fox.

8. Read the following paragraph and write the answers to the questions that follow in complete sentences.
Once there lived a jackal in a forest. One day, he did not get any food. He was very hungry. In the evening, the hungry jackal came into a village. He moved here and there in the village. He was looking for food. By chance he fell into a washer-man’s tub which was full of blue water. He became blue and other jackals could not know him. [20]

Question (i).
What is the paragraph about?
(ଅନୁଚ୍ଛେଦଟି କେଉଁ ବିଷୟରେ ?)
Answer:
The paragraph is about a hungry jackal.

Question (ii).
Where did the jackal live?
(ବିଲୁଆଟି କେଉଁଠାରେ ରହୁଥିଲା ?)
Answer:
The jackal lived in a forest.

Question (iii).
Why did he become very hungry one day?
(ଦିନେ ବିଲୁଆ କାହିଁକି ଅଧିକ ଭୋକିଲା ଥିଲା ?)
Answer:
One day the jackal did not get any food anywhere, so he became hungry

Question (iv).
When did the jackal come into the village?
(ବିଲୁଆଟି କେତେବେଳେ ଗାଁ ଭିତରକୁ ଆସିଲା ?)
Answer:
The jackal came into the village in the evening.

Question (v).
What was he searching for in the village?
(ଗାଁରେ ସେ କ’ଣ ଖୋଜୁଥୁଲା ?)
Answer:
He was searching for food in the village.

BSE Odisha 7th Class English Solutions Test-1

Question (vi).
Where did he move in the village?
(ସେ ଗାଁର କେଉଁ ଜାଗାରେ ବୁଲୁଥିଲା ?)
Answer:
He moved here and there in the village.

Question (vii).
What did he fall into?
(କେଉଁଠାରେ ସେ ପଡ଼ିଗଲା ?)
Answer:
He fell into a washer-man’s tub which was full of blue water.

Question (viii).
What happened to him when he fell into the tub?
(ଟବ୍‌ରେ ପଡ଼ିଗଲା ପରେ ତା’ର କ’ଣ ହେଲା ?)
Answer:
When he fell into the tub, he became blue.

Question (ix).
Why couldn’t the other jackals know him?
(ଅନ୍ୟ ବିଲୁଆମାନେ ତାହାକୁ କାହିଁକି ଜାଣିପାରିଲେ ନାହିଁ ?)
Answer:
Other jackals could not know him because he was looking blue quite different from them.

Question (x).
Who is ‘He’ in the last line?
(ଶେଷ ଧାଡିରେ ‘He’ କିଏ ?)
Answer:
In the last lines ‘He’ refers to the jackal.

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Odisha State Board CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Solutions Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions and Answers.

CHSE Odisha 11th Class Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Objective Questions With Answers

Question 1.
From which term the word liberty has been derived?
(a) Greek word liber
(b) Latin word liber
(c) French word liber
(d) English word liber
Answer:
(b) Latin word liber

Question 2.
Who says liberty means absence of law.
(a) Ilobbes
(b) Locke
(c) Rousseau
(d) Montesquieu
Answer:
(a) Ilobbes

Question 3.
Which of the following is a safeguard of liberty?
(a) Rule of law
(b) Democratic setup
(c) Constitutional govt.
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d)All of these

Question 4.
What does liberty mean?
(a) Absence of restraints
(b) Unrestrained freedom
(c) Freedom under legal system
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c)Freedom under legal system

Question 5.
Who says liberty and equality are antithetic?
(a) Laski
(b) Pollard
(c) Barker
(d) Lord Acton
Answer:
(d) Lord Acton

Question 6.
Economic equality pre supposes?
(a) Equalisation of income
(b) Adequate opportunity to earn livelihood
(c) Reduction of gap between rich and poor
(d) Equal income for all
Answer:
(b) Adequate opportunity to earn livelihood

Question 7.
What does social equality imply?
(a) Absence of special privilege
(b) Prohibition of discrimination
(c) Equal opportunity to men and women
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 8.
Liberty is the product of_________?
(a) Rights
(b) Freedom
(c) Law
(d) Equality
Answer:
(a) Rights

Question 9.
Who enjoy rights in a state?
(a) Citizens
(b) Nationals
(c) Subjects
(d) Leaders
Answer:
(a) Citizens

Question 10.
which of the following is not a political right?
(a) Right to vote
(b) Right to contesting election
(c) Right to form political parties
(d) Right to form association
Answer:
(d) Right to form association

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Question 11.
Which of the following is not a legal right?
(a) Civil right
(b) Political right
(c) Moral right
(d) Right to contract
Answer:
(c) Moral right

Question 12.
Which of the following is not a civil right?
(a) Right to property
(b) Right to contract
(c) Right to life
(d) Right to residence
Answer:
(d) Right to residence

Question 13.
Which day is observed every year as world Human Rights Day?
(a) January 8
(b) March 15
(c) November 10
(d) December 10
Answer:
(d) December 10

Question 14.
In which year National Human Right Commission was set up?
(a) 1950
(b) 1951
(c) 1981
(d) 1993
Answer:
(d)1993

Question 15.
What does religious liberty mean?
(a) Equality of all religions
(b) Freedom from Religion
(c) Absence of state religion
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 16.
Law is opposed to liberty, who says it?
(a) Hobbes
(b) Rousseau
(c) Locke
(d) Laski
Answer:
(b)Rousseau

Question 17.
Who says “Man is born free but everywhere in chains.
(a) Aristotle
(b) Gandhiji
(c) Rousseau
(d) J.S.Mill
Answer:
(c) Rousseau

Question 18.
Which theory regards liberty as absence of restraint?
(a) Individualism
(b) Socialism
(c) Welfare state
(d) Imperialism
Answer:
(a)Individualism

Question 19.
Which liberty believes in maintenance of world peace and brotherhood?
(a) National liberty
(b) Political liberty
(c) International liberty
(d) Natural liberty
Answer:
(b) Political liberty

Question 20.
Which of the following is not a safeguard of liberty?
(a) Rule of law
(b) Constitutional guarantee of rights
(c) Independentjudiciary
(d) Morality
Answer:
(d)Morality

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Question 21.
What does liberty imply?
(a) Absence of restraint
(b) Righttowork
(c) Natural freedom
(d) Reasonable restraints on individual freedom
Answer:
(d) Reasonable restraints on individual freedom

Question 22.
What does liberty mean in a secular state?
(a) Equality to all religions
(b) Absence of state religion
(c) Religious freedom
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 23.
Which of the following is the most important safeguard of liberty?
(a) Equality of rights
(b) Interest for rights
(c) Educated citizens
(d) Eternal vigilance
Answer:
(d) Eternal vigilance

Question 24.
Who says ‘Liberty and equality are complementary’?
(a) I.aski
(b) Lord Acton
(c) A.de Tocqueville
(d) Plato
Answer:
(a) I.aski

Question 25.
What is equality?
(a) Absolute equality
(b) Elimination of gap between rich and poor
(c) Equal right to all
(d) Equal rights and liberty to all
Answer:
(d)Equal rights and liberty to all

Question 26.
Who was the advocate of natural liberty?
(a) Hobbes
(b) Locke
(c) Rousseau
(d) J.S.Mill
Answer:
(c) Rousseau

Question 27.
Which of the following is not a safeguard of liberty?
(a) Organised public opinion
(b) Local government
(c) Fundamental rights
(d) Independent judiciary
Answer:
(b) Local government

Question 28.
Which of the following is not a political right?
(a) Right to public meeting
(b) Right to petition the government
(c) Right to form political party
(d) Right to freedom of speech & expression
Answer:
(d) Right to freedom of speech & expression

29. Which is not a nature of right?
(a) Rights are available in society
(b) Rights are absolute
(c) Rights are recognized by society
(d) Rights change with change in time
Answer:
(b) Rights are absolute

Question 30.
What is the nature of human rights?
(a) Social
(b) Political
(c) Economic
(d) Moral
Answer:
(d) Moral

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Question 31.
Who is responsible for defending human rights?
(a) state
(b) society
(c) judiciary
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 32.
In which year Universal Declaration of Human Rights was approved?
(a) 1945
(b) 1948
(c) 1950
(d) 1952
Answer:
(b) 1948

Question 33.
What is the value of liberty?
(a) Public opinion
(b) Eternal vigilance
(c) Legal Consciousness
(d) Economic equality
Answer:
(b) Eternal vigilance

Question 34.
Who says liberty is the opposite of over-government?
(a) H.J. Laski
(b) P.B. Seeley
(c) J.S.Mill
(d) Johnlocke
Answer:
(b) P.B. Seeley

Question 35.
Which of the following is not a safeguard of liberty?
(a) Rule of law
(b) Free media
(c) Alert public opinion
(d) Social equality
Answer:
(d) Social equality

Question 36.
Which type of equality is established by abolition of untouchability?
(a) Social equality
(b) Political equality
(c) Economic equality
(d) Caste equality
Answer:
(a)Social equality

Question 37.
Which of the following revaluations was the first of its kind against inequality?
(a) American war of Independence
(b) France Revolution
(c) Glorious Revolution
(d) Russian Revolution
Answer:
(b) France Revolution

Question 38.
In which century the concept of equality developed first?
(a) 16th century
(b) 17th century
(c) 18th century
(d) 19th century
Answer:
(c) 18th century

Question 39.
By entry into public service which type of justice prevails?
(a) Legal justice
(b) Political justice
(c) Social justice
(d) Economic justice
Answer:
(b) Political justice

Question 40.
Who was the advocate of distributive justice?
(a) Plato
(b) Aristotle
(c) Milton
(d) Socrates
Answer:
(b) Aristotle

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Question 41.
What type of right is Right to Residence?
(a) Civil right
(b) Political right
(c) Economic right
(d) Natural right
Answer:
(b) Political right

Question 42.
The western model of development is otherwise known as _________?
(a) Socialist development
(b) Capitalist development
(c) Material development
(d) Liberal development
Answer:
(b) Capitalist development

Question 43.
What is sustainable development?
(a) Present oriented development
(b) Future oriented development
(c) Balanced development with hope for future
(d) Slow and steady development
Answer:
(c) Balanced development with hope for future

Question 44.
What is development?
(a) Individual developments
(b) Social development
(c) Sustainable development
(d) Industrial development
Answer:
(c) Sustainable development

Question 45.
From which Latin term secular has come from?
(a) secular
(b) saicular
(c) saculum
(d) saecutam
Answer:
(c) saculum

Question 46.
what is Indian concept of secularism?
(a) Equal treatment to all religions
(b) Freedom from religious discrimination
(c) Religious tolerance and freedom
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 47.
What is western conception of secularism?
(a) Religious freedom
(b) Religious tolerance
(c) Non interference in religious sphere
(d) Unity of all religions
Answer:
(c) Non interference in religious sphere

Question 48.
Which of the following is a principle of capitalist model of development?
(a) Centrally controlled economy
(b) Abolition of economic inequality
(c) Welfare state
(d) Liberal society economy and administration
Answer:
(d) Liberal society economy and administration

Question 49.
What is sustainable development?
(a) Development of society
(b) Development of individual
(c) Modernisation
(d) Development of society, economic and environment
Answer:
(d) Development of society, economic and environment

Question 50.
Which model of development believes in free market economy?
(a) Capitalist development
(b) Socialist development
(c) Sustainable development
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Capitalist development

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Question 51.
Which development model believes in environmental safety?
(a) Socialist development
(b) Capitalist development
(c) Sustainable development
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Sustainable development

Answer The Following Questions 

Question 1.
From which word the term liberty derived?
Answer:
Latin word liber

Question 2.
What is negative liberty?
Answer:
Absence of restraint

Question 3.
The freedom which gives an individual the opportunity to participate actively in the affairs of state is _________?
Answer:
Political liberty

Question 4.
What is the other name of legal equality?
Answer:
Civil equality

Question 5.
What is the essence one man one vote?
Answer:
Political equality

Question 6.
What is the motto of justice?
Answer:
Let right be done

Question 7.
Which type of justice eliminates the gap between rich and poor?
Answer:
Economic justice

Question 8.
Which type justice can be maintained by abolition of untouchability?
Answer: Social justice

Question 9.
Reservation of scheduled caste, and scheduled tribes, is meant to ensure which form of justice?
Answer:
Social justice

Question 10.
What emerges from the product of rights?
Answer:
Liberty

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Question 11.
who says ’man is born free but everywhere in chains?
Answer:
Rousseau

Question 12.
‘Might is right’ symbolizes which type of liberty?
Answer:
Natural liberty

Question 13.
What does national liberty imply?
Answer:
Independence of the state

Question 14.
Absence of special privilege implies which type of equality?
Answer:
Negative equality

Question 15.
Discrimination based on sex and color prohibits which type of equality.
Answer:
Social equality

Question 16.
Who says ‘Liberty and equality are opposed to each other.
Answer:
Lord Acton and A. De Tocqueville

Question 17.
Who says ‘Liberty and equality are complementary.
Answer:
Laski and Barker.

Question 18.
Which body approved the universal declaration of human rights?
Answer:
UN General Assembly

Question 19.
Which type of justice can be realized by universal suffrage?
Answer:
Political justice

Question 20.
John Austin and Thomas Hobbes were the exponents of which form of justice?
Answer:
Legal justice

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Question 21.
Who says ’Rights are the conditions of social life?
Answer:
Laski

Question 22.
A socialist state opposes which right?
Answer:
Right to property

Question 23.
Which was the first written document on Human Rights?
Answer:
Magnacarta of 1215 AD

Question 24.
Which day is observed as World Human Rights Day?
Answer:
December, 10

Question 25.
Which type of right gives you the opportunity to ask for something from your friend?
Answer:
Moral right

Question 26.
Rights are valueless without which right?
Answer:
Right to life

Question 27.
Which model of development gives priority to market based development?
Answer:
Capitalist model

Question 28.
Which model of development thinks of the present as well as future?
Answer:
Sustainable development

Question 29.
Which secularism approach pleads for separation of Religion from politics?
Answer:
Western Secularism

Question 30.
In which country secularism is considered a slogan for vote bank politics?
Answer:
India

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Fill in the blanks

1. Liberty is derived from the___________word liber.
Answer: Latin

2. National liberty means ___________.
Answer: Independence

3. Liberty is the product of___________.
Answer: Rights

4. Liberty means absence of ___________.
Answer: Restraints

5. __________ is not license.
Answer: Liberty

6. Absence of restraint means ___________ liberty.
Answer: Negative

7. Reasonable restraint on the liberty of individual is, __________ liberty.
Answer: Positive

8. Liberty and __________ are complementary.
Answer: Equality

9. Eternal vigilance is the price of ___________.
Answer: Liberty

10. Equality means absence of ___________.
Answer: Special privilege

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

11. one man one vote is a principle of equality, ___________.
Answer: Political

12. __________ equality is necessary for the successful working of democracy.
Answer: Political

13. The state grants __________for the development of individual personality.
Answer: Rights

14. Right to property is a __________ right.
Answer: Civil

15. Right to vote is a __________ right.
Answer: Political

16. In a __________ state economic rights are secured.
Answer: Socialist

17. Human Rights are __________ rights.
Answer: Moral

18. Political rights are enjoyed only by __________ in a state.
Answer: Citizens

19. The term justice has been derived from the Latin word __________.
Answer: equality

20. _________ was the advocate of natural liberty.
Answer: Rousseau

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

21. Political liberty is valueless without __________.
Answer: Economic

22. Right to freedom of religion seeks to make India a __________ state.
Answer: Secular

23. Rule of law is a condition of __________.
Answer: Safeguard of Liberty

24. Law is a condition of __________.
Answer: Liberty

25. __________ eliminates all discriminations based on caste, religion and regionalism.
Answer: Social equality

26. Sex discrimination violates ___________ equality.
Answer: Social

27. The state by providing basic minimum needs for all establishes __________ justice.
Answer: Economic

28. The eliminates social discriminations to ___________ ensure justice.
Answer: Social

29. Right to life is a __________ right.
Answer: Civil

30. Right to residence is a __________ right.
Answer: Political

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

31. Right to property is a _________ right.
Answer: Civil

32. Right to freedom of speech and expression is a _________ right.
Answer: Civil

33. Right to rest and leisure is a _________ right.
Answer: Economic

34. _________ model of development believes in free economic competition.
Answer: Capitalist

35. Economic inequality considers in a _________ model of development.
Answer: Capitalist

36. _________ development model gives protection to the working class.
Answer: Socialist

37. __________ development model ensures due regard to environmental safety.
Answer: Sustainable

38. Protection of minorities is the catchword of __________ secularism.
Answer: Indian

39. __________ secularism rejects violence and bloodshed in the name of religion.
Answer: Indian

40. The National Human Rights Commission was set up in the year __________.
Answer: 1993

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Answer In One Sentence

Question 1.
What is liberty?
Answer:
Liberty means freedom enjoyed by the people under the law of state.

Question 2.
What is equality?
Answer:
Equality means absence of special privilege and equal opportunity to all.

Question 3.
what is negative liberty?
Answer:
Negative liberty means absence of restraint on individual freedom.

Question 4.
What is positive liberty?
Answer:
The rights and freedom guaranteed by the state to the individuals for their development is known as positive liberty.

Question 5.
What is political liberty?
Answer:
Political liberty consists of those political rights through which an individual takes active part in the affairs of state.

Question 6.
What is economic liberty?
Answer:
Economic liberty means the freedom of an individual from economic exploitation and insecurity.

Question 7.
What is civil liberty?
Answer:
Civil liberty consists of those rights which an individual enjoys as a member of civil society.

Question 8.
What is moral liberty?
Answer:
Moral liberty means respect for moral values and principles and the freedom to act as per the instruction of conscience,

Question 9.
What is natural liberty?
Answer:
Natural liberty is an abstract idea which people enjoyed in the imaginary state of nature.

Question 10.
What is National liberty?
Answer:
National liberty means freedom from foreign control or independence of the state.

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Question 11.
What is rule of law?
Answer:
Rule of law means law is sovereign and all individuals are equally subjected to it.

Question 12.
What is separation of power?
Answer:
Separation of power means distribution of powers between executive, legislation and judiciary in a state.

Question 13.
What is decentralization of power?
Answer:
Decentralization of power means division of responsibility between Union Government, State and local bodies.

Question 14.
What is natural equality?
Answer:
Natural equality implies that God has gives all individuals with equal psychological traints mental ability and capacity.

Question 15.
What is legal equality?
Answer:
Legal equality means equality before law and equal protection of law to one and all.

Question 16.
What is social equality?
Answer:
Social equality means giving equal social opportunities and privileges to all.

Question 17.
What is political equality?
Answer:
Political equality means equal opportunity to all citizens to participate in the affairs of state.

Question 18.
What is economic equality?
Answer:
Economic equality means to give fair and adequate opportunity to an for work and to earn their livelihood.

Question 19.
What is international equality?
Answer:
International equality means grant of equal status to each state in the international sphere irrespective of its physical and maternal strength.

Question 20.
What is justice?
Answer:
Justice implies rituality, fair treatment to all and maintenance of social discipline.

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Question 21.
What is legal justice?
Answer:
The justice maintained by the legal system is called legal justice.

Question 22.
What is social justice?
Answer:
Social justice believes in an ideal social order in which social equality and rights are enjoyed by all.

Question 23.
what is political justice?
Answer:
Political justice refers to the freedom and opportunity provided to each individual to participate in the political life of the community.

Question 24.
What is economic justice?
Answer:
Economic justice means freedom from economic Exploitation inequality and die opportunity to earn one’s livelihood.

Question 25.
What is distributive justice?
Answer:
Distributive justice means to give every individual his due on the basis of his caliber and efficiency.

Question 26.
What is corrective justice?
Answer:
Corrective justice means to give compensation to a sufferer and to rectify the wrong done to an individual.

Question 27.
What is right?
Answer:
Rights are the conditions of social life which the state guarantees to all individuals.

Question 28.
What is moral right?
Answer:
The rights which are based on the moral values and conscience of an individual are called moral right.

Question 29.
What is a legal rights?
Answer:
The rights which are guaranteed through the law of state are called legal rights.

Question 30.
What is civil right?
Answer:
Civil right comprises of those rights which enable an individual to lead a decent social life.

CHSE Odisha Class 11 Political Science Unit 2 Basic Concept Objective Questions

Question 31.
What is political right?
Answer:
Political rights are those rights which enable an individual to participate actively in the affairs of state.

Question 32.
What is economic right?
Answer:
The economic rights are those opportunities which provide economic security and necessity to an individual.

Question 33.
What is human right?
Answer:
Human rights are those universal natural rights which enable an individual to lead a dignified life in society.

Question 34.
What is universal declaration of Human Rights?
Answer:
Universal declaration of human rights is a solemn affirmation by the world community about the value and importance of human rights.

Question 35.
What is development?
Answer:
Development is an indication of social political, economic and cultural progress of a nation.

Question 36.
What is sustainable development?
Answer:
Sustainable development refers to a process of development ensuring socio economic progress of the nation along with protection of environment.

Question 37.
What is socialist model of development?
Answer:
Socialist model of development refers to socio economic progress of the nation with state control over production and distribution.

Question 38.
What is capitalist development model?
Answer:
Capitalist model of development believes in industrial technological development of the nation under a liberal free market economy.

Question 39.
What is secularism?
Answer:
Secularism is a policy of keeping die state administration and policy-making process free from religious influence.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

Odisha State Board CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Solutions Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions.

CHSE Odisha 12th Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

Long Type Questions With Answers

Question 1.
Identify the basic principles of India’s foreign policy?
Answer:
Every sovereign country has its foreign policy. India too has one. Foreign policy refers to the sum total of principles, interests and objectives which a country promotes while interacting with other countries. Even though there are certain basic features of a foreign policy it is not a fixed .concept. The thrust of foreign policy keeps on changing according to changing international conditions. India’s foreign policy is shaped by several factors including its history, culture, geography and economy. Our Prime Minister, Jawaharlal Nehru, gave a definite shape to the country’s foreign policy.

Preservation of national interest, achievement of world peace, disarmament, independence for Afro-Asian nations have been important objectives of India’s foreign policy. These objectives are sought to be achieved through some principles viz. Panchsheel; no alignment; anti-colonialism, anti-imperialism, anti-racism, and strengthening the UN. It would be befitting to expand these principles.

Question 2.
What is Panchsheel?
Answer:
Nehru was a believer in world peace. He understood the linkage between peace for development and survival of mankind. He had seen the destruction caused by the two world wars and therefore realized that for the progress of a nation a long spell of peace was needed. In its absence social and economic priorities relating to development tend to get pushed to the background.

The production of nuclear weapons strengthened Nehru’s faith in the peaceful philosophy even more. Hence he gave utmost importance to world peace in his policy planning. India’s desired peaceful and friendly relations with all countries, particularly the big powers and the neighbouring nations; while signing an agreement with China, on April 28, 1954, India advocated adherence to five guiding principles known as Panchsheel for the conduct of bilateral relations. It includes the following:

  • Mutual respect for each other’s territorial integrity and sovereignty.
  • Mutual non-aggression.
  • Mutual non-interference in each other’s internal affairs.
  • Equality and mutual benefit.
  • Peaceful co-existence.
  • The Panchsheel agreement enumerates best the principles of peaceful co-existence with neighbours. It is an important component of India’s foreign policy.

Question 3.
Explain the meaning and significance of non-alignment.
Answer:
Non-alignment has been regarded as the most important feature of India’s foreign policy. Non alignment aimed to maintain national independence in foreign affairs by not joining any military alliance formed by the USA and Soviet Union in the aftermath of the Second World War. Non-alignment was neither neutrality nor non-involvement nor isolationism.

It was a dynamic concept which meant not committing to any military bloc but taking an independent stand on international issues according to the merits of each case. The policy of non-alignment won many supporters in the developing countries as it provided an opportunity to them for protecting their sovereignty as also retaining their freedom of action during the tension ridden cold war period.

India played an important role in forging the non-aligned movement (NAM). The concept of NAM emerged through a gradual process. Nehru took the initiative to convene the Asian Relations Conference in New Delhi in 1947. Later on a Conference, of 29 countries of Asia and Africa was held in Bandung (Indonesia) in 1955.

This was the first gathering of its kind which pledged to work together for colonial liberation, peace, cultural, economic and political cooperation. Bandung to Belgrade in 1961 where the first NAM conference was held was a logical process to project an alternative to cold war bloc politics and assertion of newly independent countries of their independent and sovereign rights.

Question 4.
Analyse the relevance of non-alignment in the post cold war period.
Answer:
Cold War was intense rivalry between USA and Soviet Union without fighting a direct war to attract allies in Africa, Asia and Latin America. It started soon after the Second World War and continued for forty five years. These two big countries became two opposite poles known as East and West. The world politics revolved around these two poles. Thus the world became bipolar. Among the non-aligned, Nehru had evolved special relationship with President Tito of Yugoslavia and Nasser of Egypt.

These three are regarded as the founding fathers of the Non-Aligned Movement. The non-aligned movement was a group of the newly independent states who refused to accept the dictates of the former colonial masters and decided to act according to their own judgement on issues of international concern. Non-aligned India and the World movement is anti-imperialist in approach. India as the prime architect of non-alignment and as one of the leading members of the non-aligned movement has taken an active part in its growth.

The Non-Aligned Movement is providing all member states, regardless of size and importance, an opportunity to participate in global decision making and world politics. India hosted the Seventh NAM Summit at New Delhi in 1983. India hoped NAM take up the cause of development, disarmament and the Palestine question.

Since NAM was a product of the cold war scenario and the bipolar world, many scholars have questioned the relevance of NAM after the end of cold war and demise of the Soviet Union. However, even in the present scenario NAM has a significant role to play, First, with the disintegration of Soviet Union, the world faces threat from unipolar world. The NAM can act as a check against US dominance.

Secondly the developed (North) and developing (South) world are divided over several economic issues. The NAM remains a very relevant forum for third world countries to engage the developed nations in a productive dialogue. Moreover, the NAM can prove to be powerful instrument for South-South cooperation. Such a thing is essential if the third world countries are to increase their bargaining power vis-a-vis the developed world. India continues to take active part in the non-aligned movement even after the end of cold war. Finally, the developing countries united under the forum of NAM have to fight for the reform of UN and change it according to the requirements of 21st century.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

Question 5.
Explain the major concerns in India’s foreign policy in the post cold war period.
Answer:
The end of cold war in 1989 has brought about significant changes in the international scene and hence new policy problems for the various states in the developing world including India. The new situation is made by greater uncertainty and complexity. For India, disintegration of the Soviet Union has meant uncertainty on several aspects viz.

supply of weapons system, supply of spare parts, diplomatic support on Kashmir and other politico-strategic issues in and outside the United Nations and as a counter weight to US in South Asia. During the last one decade and a half international politics has undergone major changes.

The cold war has ended, the world has become unipolar, a number of states have disintegrated, cold war military blocs have lost their significance, some such blocs have dissolved and new regional economic blocs are shaping up. Globalisation has given rise to new set of problems such as terrorism, money laundering, proliferation of weapons, global warming etc.

These problems are not endemic to any region but affect all the countries to some extent or the other. This has forced many nation states which were hitherto enemies to cooperate with each other to solve problems which are universal in nature. In this changed international scenario it has become imperative for UN to restructure and reform itself if it is to effectively respond to emerging challenges.

Militancy in Kashmir has emerged as the formost challenge to our foreign policy. Pakistan and the Western countries blamed India for violating human rights and denial of rights to self determination. Gradually, India brought: situation under control. Because of the Kashmir dispute, India’s relations with Pakistan sharply deteriorated. India accused Pakistan of fanning trouble through cross border terrorism in Kashmir and other parts of our country.

India conducted nuclear weapon tests in 1998, followed by Pakistan’s tests. Pakistan resorted to further mischief by secretly sending its soldiers into Kargil in India and the World order to cut off the Kashmir valley from the rest of India. India handled the challenge firmly and effectively. Now engaging Pakistan in a constructive and composite dialogue process remains a challenge to India’s foreign policy, because there is a great deal of push from the United States.

Spread of terrorism to corners beyond Kashmir is a challenge as well as opportunity for our foreign policy nowadays. India is interested in forging anti-terrorism coalition with as many countries as possible. Keeping old friendship and looking for new friendships is another challenge for our foreign policy after the cold war has ended. For example, India is interested in strengthening its relations without damaging its relations with Arab countries.

Similarly,’ India’s foreign policy is tackling new tasks like deepening economic and security cooperation with the United States, while at the same time opposing unilateral actions against Iraq and Yugoslavia. Finally, India is realizing the growing importance of economic aspects of foreign policy. Hence, it is trying to establish a new basis for its relations with neighbouring countries in South Asia, China and the South East Asian counties.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

Question 6.
Recognise India’s contribution to UN efforts for peace and disarmament.
Answer:
The United Nations which came into being on Oct. 24, 1945 has been the most important international organisation since the Second World War. The formal basis for UN activities is the UN charter. The UN has a vital role in world affairs. For more than fifty years UN has helped to manage relations between states and regulate a broad range of international activities.

It has worked to protect the security of people and promote peace and development. One way in which UN has contributed to world peace is by taking up the cause of disarmament India has also contributed immensely to UN’s disarmament efforts. Disarmament is limitation, reduction and possible elimination of dangerous (like nuclear) weapons.

Since independence, India has consistently pursued the objective of global disarmament based on the principles of non-discrimination. Given the destructive capacity of nuclear weapons, India has always believed that a world free of nuclear weapons would enhance global security. Thus India has always advocated that highest priority be given to nuclear disarmament as a first step towards general and complete disarmament.

India has contributed to UN significantly on disarmament in terms of ideas, resolutions, initiatives and bridging differences through action plans. In 1948, India had proposed limiting the use of atomic energy to peaceful purposes and elimination of nuclear weapons from national arsenals. In 1950, India suggested formation of a UN Peace Fund created through peaceful reduction of arms and directing the amount thus released towards development purposes. In 1954, India advocated the cause for a comprehensive nuclear test ban treaty.

India was the first to become party to partial Test Ban Treaty in 1963. Hence India strongly and consistents refused to join the Treaty. In 1964, India took the initiative to place the item ‘non-proliferation of weapons’ on UN agenda. However, the purpose was defeated by the (1968) carried that a large numbering of counties from going nuclear, without firm restrictions on the few nuclear weapon countries activities Nuclear Non¬proliferation Treaty Although our country allged to the oppose to problem.

In 1984, India launched a Six-Nation Five Continent Peace Initiative along with Argentina, Greece, Mexico, Sweden and Tanzania. Four years later (in a joint declaration issued on the occasion of visit of President Gorbachev of Soviet Union the then Prime Minister, Rajiv Gandhi made a forceful plea for the elimination of nuclear weapons.

The Delhi declaration enumerated ten principles for building a nuclear weapon free world). In 1988, Rajiv Gandhi proposed an Action Plan for ushering in a nuclear weapon free and nonviolent world order. The Action Plan envisaged a binding commitment by all nations to the elimination of nuclear weapons in stages by 2010.

India is also an original signatory to the Chemical Weapons Convention, having signed it on Jan. 14, 1993 and was among the first 65 countries to have ratified the treaty. In 1993 India sponsored a resolution on comprehensive test ban along with the US within the overall framework of advancing towards nuclear disarmament. India was distressed when final version of the CTBT was rushed through without consenses. And it failed to address the security reasons of India.

Hence it bravely stood against the steadlity fashion in which some tests use canned while sophisticated nuclear tests were not in a way, India’s conduct of nuclear tests in 1998 could we linked to the unfair framework of CTBT, though many initially misunderstood India’s tests as a negative development for disarmament; India pledged to continue to work for inaugural and non-discriminaly nuclear disarmament.

Question 7.
Explain India’s participation in UN peace keeping and its claim for a permanent seat in the Security Council.
Answer:
India’s history of participation in UN peacekeeping operations is a long one. India’s contribution has been described as excellent by many political observers. In UN. India’s contribution has been acknowledged by members of the international communities.

Peace keeping stands for prevention, containment and termination of hostilities between or within states through the non offensive activities of multinational forces of soldiers, police and civilian people sent unto the authority of the United Nations with the consent of the countries concerned. Peacekeeping nations changed in its scope and nature according to needs of a conflict situation.

India has taken part in 35 of UN peacekeeping operations in four continents. Its most significant contribution has been to peace and stability in Africa and Asia. Presently India is ranked as the largest troop contributor to UN.

The saga of India’s role in UN peace keeping began with the establishment of the United Nation’s Emergency Force (UNEF) in the Gaza strip and the Sinai in 1956 after Israeli war against Egypt ended.The Congo in Africa benefitted significantly from troop presence. India’s contributed to keep unity and integrity of that history in 1960s.

After the end of cold war, India’s contribution to UN peacekeeping remains significant equaly, if not more, military personal at the request of the United Nations Secretery General to Angola, Cambodia, Somalia, El Salvador and Sierra Leone etc. Many of these countries were victims of chaos caused by civil wars. No government machinery collapsed or was discredited. India sent not just troops, but police, doctors, engineers and administrators.

As you already know, the efficiency of peace maintenance in the world depends on the effectiveness of the Security Council but the Council has suffered in this regard due to its outdated, unchanged membership.

Presently the permanent membership of the Security Council is confined to US, Russia, Great Britain, France and China. However, such composition of the Security Council does not take into account the current global power configuration which has changed since the days when these countries were inducted as permanent members.

Since India has emerged as the fourth fastest growing economy and also because of the leadership it has provided in all international fora, its contribution to UN peacekeeping, its track record in espousing the cause of the third world, India has a strong case for a permanent seat in the Security Council. We are getting support from many friendly countries. A final decision on the matter is likely to take some time, because of its complexity.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

Question 8.
India and China are the two great giants of Asia- Explain.
Answer:
Besides being the most populous countries, they are also two of the most ancient civilisations of the world. Historically, several historians have successfully traced the cultural linkages dating back to 2nd century BC. As a result of the communist revolution in 1949, China became the People’s Republic of China (PRC), under the leadership of Mao Tse Tung.

Nehru regarded India as China’s rival for the leadership of the non-white people of the world. India, on the other hand, tried India and the World its best to come close to China. It was the first non-communist country to recognise communist China in 1949. India fully supported China’s claim for membership in the United Nations. It also acknowledged China’s claim over Formosa (Taiwan).

It refused to be a party to peace treaty with Japan without China. In the Korean crisis too, India refused to brand China as aggressor when China intervened on behalf of North Korea. In fact, India supported China even though the Western bloc especially USA was displeased with it.

Nehru’s China policy received the first jolt in 1950, when China occupied Tibet in 1950. It is important to remember in this context that India had long term interests in Tibet because it was a buffer lying between India and China. India even enjoyed certain special privileges in Tibet. Therefore direct Chinese control over Tibet was likely to endanger these, and India’s security.

India’s suggestions for a peaceful settlement of the Tibet problem were treated as interference by the communist regime. Gradually the Tibetans grew restless under China’s yoke and rose in revolt in 1959. China ruthlessly suppressed the movement and declared Tibet as an integral part of China. The head of Tibet, Dalai Lama took shelter in India while Tibet lost whatever autonomy it still enjoyed.

The granting of political shelter to Dalai Lama by India added to China’s distrust. China appreciated India’s neutral and mediatory role in easing the Korean problem (1950-53). Thus, began a period of friendship between the two countries, with the signing of the Sino-Indian Treaty of friendship in 1954. This treaty put a seal of approval upon Chinese suzerainty over Tibet.

The Preamble of the treaty embodies the famous ‘Panchsheel Principles’ about which you have studied (lesson number 26). This agreement initiated a period of relaxed relationship, marked by the slogan of Hindi Chini Bhai Bhai. It is interesting to note that at the Bandung Conference (1955), Nehru actively brought China into the hold of the Afro-Asian solidarity.

Question 9.
Write about the Boundary Dispute between India and China.
Answer:
The 1950s were marked by the boundary dispute between India and China, the- flash point of which unfortunately caused a war between the two countries in 1902. China first started to claim large parts of Indian territory in North East Frontier Agency (NEFA, now Arunachal Pradesh) and Ladakh by publishing maps in which these were shown as included in China. China continued extending its borders and also constructed a 110 mile long road -across Aksai China area (Ladakh) of India in 1956-57.

In 1959, China put claim to some 50, appa sq. miles of Indian territory and also denied the validity of McMahon Line. By. this time Tibet had been fully integrated into China; it was in a strong position at the India-China border with Chinese troops posted all along.

While the two countries were m dispute over the McMahon line issue, China launched a massive attack on India in October. 1962, in the NEFA as well as the Ladakh sector. After overrunning large areas of Indian territory, China announced a unilateral ceasefire after occupying huge territory of India-200’s Question miles in the North Eastern sector and 15,000 s Question miles in Ladakh.

A futile attempt to work out a peaceful settlement between the two countries was made by Sri Lanka. The Colombo Proposals failed because China refused to agree on conditions contained in them. For long in the years following the war, China-India relations did not show any improvement. In fact, China went out of the way to make friends with Pakistan, just to isolate and contain India.

Question 10.
Discuss Normalisation of Relations restored between India and Pakistan.
Answer:
Although the two countries resumed diplomatic relations in 1976 by exchanging ambassadors. The efforts of normalisation of Sino-Indian relations received a boost when then Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi paid a successful five day visit to China in 1988. The two countries pledged to settle the border dispute through dialogue.

Several high level visits followed including visit by Ex-Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee in 2003. The two countries agreed to keep the border dispute apart and develop friendly relations in other fields. Until the border dispute is resolved, both countries agreed to maintain peace and tranquillity on the Line of Actual Control (LAC).

One could see a clear shift in the Chinese attitude towards India. The fact that erstwhile USSR had mended fences with China, there were no more apprehensions from the South. Moreover, China’s post-1979 economic transformation demanded big markets for its massive production under economic liberalisation.

President Jiang Zemin’s visit.to India in 1996 witnessed a major consolidation of this progress. This was first ever visit of China’s head of State to India. China’s withdrawal of support to Naga and Mizo rebels; meaningful silence on the status of Sikkim (China considered Sikkim’s status as that of an independent state) and a neutral stand on Kashmir issue could be seen as positive shift in Chinese attitude towards India.

Nevertheless, there was suddenly a brief setback in the mutual ties of the two after the nuclear explosions by India during 1998. These were followed by sharp Chinese reaction and its leading role in getting the resolutions condemning the tests in UN and similar fora, passed. These tests by India were seen as neutralising Chinese prominence in the region.

But the Chinese posture of neutrality during thp Indo-Pak military showdown in Kashmir, Kargil sector in 1999 exhibited China’s inclination to toe a softer and friendly line with India. In fact, Chinese refusal to interfere in the conflict forced Pakistan for cessation of hostilities with India.

However, Ex-Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee’s 2003 visit to China is a renewed effort in the promotion of close and cordial ties between the two neighbours. The border agreement has recognised the Nathula Pass in Sikkim as a border pass, implying that China no more considers Sikkim- as an independent state.

Another positive breakthrough was the Joint Declaration that underlined the need to explore a framework of a boundary settlement at political level of bilateral relations. This is an acknowledgement that the key issue in resolving the dispute is political.

This is seen as Beijing’s readiness to give up its policy of delaying dialogue. India’s National Security Advisor and Chinese Vice Minister have been appointed for holding the tasks. The developments at the diplomatic and political levels have been supplemented by fresh initiatives at the economic level to strengthen bilateral relations. The border trade between India and China has crossed $ 10 billion quickly.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

Question 11.
India Pakistan relationship.
Answer:
No two countries in the world have so much in common as India and Pakistan. Yet they have perpetually been in a state of undeclared war with varying degree of intensity. Pakistan’s aggression in Kargil (1999) brought the two countries even on the verge of a nuclear confrontation. The legacy of suspicion and mistrust predates the partition of India in 1947. During the freedom struggle the Muslim League, under the leadership of Mohammad Ali Jinnah propounded the two-nation theory, in support of a separate Muslim state.

Jinnah insisted that since Hindus and Muslims, were two communities, two separate states must be constituted for the two communities. The Indian National Congress (INC)’s long rejection of and reluctant acceptance of partition gave room for suspicion in Pakistan that India would try to undo the partition and divide Pakistan.

Moreover, Pakistan was concerned at the possibility of India’s domination in the region and its inability to match India’s power all by itself. Pakistan developed a perception that it is an incomplete state without Kashmir being incorporated into it. On the other hand, India perceives Kashmir’s accession and integration into India as an essential element of its secular and federal democratic structure.

Question 12.
Discuss about the problems of The Kashmir Issue.
Answer:
At the time of partition Jammu and Kashmir (J&K) was one of those several princely states, the fate of which was left uncertain in 1947. Pakistan desired that Kashmir with Muslim majority population should join Muslim country, Pakistan. But the popular leader of National Congress opposed Pakistan’s ideology.

Maharaja Hari Singh did not take a decision until Pakistan sent armed intruders into the Kashmir valley in October 1947. Seeking Indian help to repulse the Pakistani intruders Maharaja signed the ‘Instrument of Accession’ making Jammu and Kashmir a part of Indian Union.

On this occasion, as true democrat, Prime Minister Nehru assured that after Pakistani aggression was cleared* the future status of the state would be decided on the basis of wishes of the people of Kashmir. Since India did not want an open clash with Pakistan, it referred the matter to the United Nations.

Indian forces saved Srinagar from the invaders, pushed back the Pakistanis from the Kashmir Valley. But the whole of Kashmir could not be recaptured, at it would have meant direct and difficult war between the two new nations. India sought United Nations help in 1948. A ceasefire came to be implemented on January 1, 1949.

It left a large part of Jammu and Kashmir (nearly 2/5 of the State) under Pakistan’s possession, which We call Pakistan Occupied Kashmir (POK). In 1950s the UN mediators put forward several plans to resolve the dispute, but they failed to bridge the differences between the two countries.

The problem of Kashmir is still pending. Plebiscite was to be conducted only after Pakistan withdrew its forces from the occupied territory, as per the UN*resolution of 1948, which Pakistan refused to comply. Hence India pleaded that the wishes of the people were ascertained in 1954 in the form the direct election to the Constituent Assembly which satisfied the accession of Jammu and Kashmir to India. The mediation come to an end.

Pakistan was desperate to capture Kashmir. Thinking that India’s army was weak after defeat in the war with China in 1962, Pakistan tried through a war to take Kashmir in 1965. But Indian forces defeated the Pakistani designs. Moreover, Pakistan suffered another humiliation, when its eastern wing, 1000 miles away from West Pakistan successfully waged independence struggle in 1971.

India played a key role in the war to liberate Bangladesh. The birth of Bangladesh proved to be the final burial of two-nation theory on the basis of which Pakistan put a claim to Kashmir. Pakistan was reduced to one-fourth of the size of India.

This altered the power equation in South Asia in India’s favour. In order to normalise relations India invited Pakistan for an agreement, the result of which was the Shimla Pact of 1972.

This Shimla agreement however bears important significance as the two countries agreed to seek the settlement of all bilateral problems, including Kashmir, mutually without the intervention of any third party. Thus under the Shimla Pact, the Kashmir issue cannot be raised in international or any other forum, although Pakistan has not hesitated to ignore the sprit of the agreement. The agreement also talked about the return of Prisoners of War (POW).

Though Pakistan’s territory in India’s possession was returned, a new cease-fire line (in place of the old cease-fire line of 1948-49) was drawn, which is known as the LoC, Pakistan found ways other than open war to destabilise India by encouraging and assisting terrorism in Punjab, and the State-sponsored militancy in Jammu and Kashmir since the mid 1980s.

Pakistan still continues to encourage terrorist and separatist tendencies in Kashmir, operatirigtnainly from terrorist training camps situated in POK.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

The sanctity of the LoC that came to be agreed upon between India and Pakistan under the Shimla Agreement of 1972, was violated by Pakistan in May 1999 as a part of a big plan. This was done when the Pakistani forces infiltrated into India, after crossing the line of control in Kargil, Drass and Batelik sectors of J &K. Indian army once again gave a befitting defeat in a war that continued for about 60 days.

The purpose of Pakistani operation in Kargil was to create a crisis with a threat of nuclear war, which would in turn ensure intervention by the United States in its favour on Kashmir dispute. Neither United States nor China came to Pakistan’s help. In fact, Pakistan had a diplomatic and military defeat.

Question 13.
Discuss about Nuclear Tests and Efforts Towards Improvement of Relations.
Answer:
Indo-Pakistan relations acquired an entirely new dimension in the context Of nuclear tests by both India and Pakistan in May 1998. The relations between the two neighbours hit a India and the World new low. India has been facing a nuclear threat arising out of China’s clandestine support to build up of the nuclear weapon capability of Pakistan since the mid-seventies.

No doubt, Pakistan’s nuclear policy is targeted against India The extreme bitterness and tension between India and Pakistan in the aftermath of the nuclear tests of May 1998 did bring with it an increasing realisation on both sides that things could not continue in the same manner indefinitely. That, some meeting ground between the two neighbours has to be found.

Thus, foreign secretary level talks started, and a direct bus service between Delhi and Lahore was proposed. Prime Minister Vajpayee’s Bus Diplomacy in 1999 marked a tremendous goodwill between the two countries. The Lahore Declaration signed at the time underlined the need for resolving all outstanding issues, including that of Kashmir, through peaceful meAnswer: While India agreed to bring Kashmir onto the agreed agenda along with other areas of mutual benefits, Pakistan conceded to bilateralism.

The reference to the ‘composite and integrated’ dialogue process implied that the two would not be a hostage to any single issue. Despite the rupture caused by the Kargil war and the terrorist attack against our Parliament (December 2001) the unconditional dialogue has been resumed.

The emphasis in these talks is to promote people to people contacts across LoC, and also improve economic ties between India and Pakistan. Change of government in India has not meant any deviation from our commitment to peaceful and prosperous co-existence with Pakistan.

Question 14.
India Relation with Sri Lanka.
Answer:
Sri Lanka, earlier known as Ceylon (until 1972), is a small island country situated in the Indian Ocean to the south of India. Its total area is 25,332 s Question miles. Of all countries, it has geographical proximity to India. Only 18 miles wide shallow water in the Palk Straits separates Jaffna in northern Sri Lanka from the Southernmost tip of the Indian state of Tamil Nadu.

Its geostrategic location in the Indian Ocean (at the centre of commercial and strategic sea and air routes) and its closeness to US naval base in Deigo Garcia indicates its importance far beyond its size, population and resources. The history of cultural relations between India and Sri Lanka dates back to the ancient times.

Out of the total population of Sri Lanka, about 64 percent believe in Buddhism and about 15 percent believe in Hinduism. Sri Lanka became a British colony in early 19th century. It was granted independence on February 4,1948. India-Sri Lanka relations have generally been cordial, though there have been occasions of tense relations due to the ethnic conflict between Tamils and the Sinhalese.

Despite ethnic problems, India has never sought to impose its will on Sri Lanka and has always based its foreign policy towards this southern neighbour on mutual understanding and friendship.

An important area of common interest between the two neighbours is the foreign policy of non-alignment. Sri Lanka has generally stood neutral in Sino-Indian disputes. In fact, it made efforts to mediate between India and China after the war of 1962. Sri Lanka also showed understanding when India become nuclear. Recently in 2005, India extended valuable help to Sri Lanka after Tsunami devastated the coastal areas of that country.

Question 15.
Write about the Problem of Indian Tamils.
Answer:
Jaffna province of Sri Lanka has large concentration of Tamil population. The problem became serious when Tamilians began demanding a national homeland or “Eelam” in northern Sri Lanka. It is important to understand that there are essentially two categories of Tamilians in Sri Lanka: The Ceylon Tamils whose forefathers had migrated to Sri Lanka centuries ago.

They are estimated to be one million. The second category is of Indian Tamils whose forefathers were taken by the Britishers as plantation workers in the 19th century. They are another one million, many of them without citizenship. The problem of their status dominated early India-Sri Lanka relations. The conflict with Ceylon Tamils came later. The Sinhalese fear Tamil domination, which is the principal reason behind the ethnic conflict.

The difference between the two communities was exploited by British rulers in order to check the growing Sinhalese nationalism. The Tamils were allowed to enter the administration structure and thus gradually took control of the trade and profession. Scarce economic resources and opportunities plus the majority pressure from its own people forced the Government of Sri Lanka to pass series of steps to reducing the importance of Tamils- Indian and the Ceylonese.

The representation of Tamilians in public service in 1948 was 30 percent, but by 1975 it had fallen to mere 5 percent. The Sinhalese were encouraged to settle down in Tamil dominated areas in large numbers. The citizenship law of 1948 and 1949 had deprived about 10 lakh Indian Tamils of political rights. The Tamil youth who had lost faith in non-violence organised themselves into Liberation Tigers. The aim of these ‘Tigers’ is a sovereign Tamil State of Eelam.

The issue of Tamilians, and the policy pursued by government cast a dark shadow on Indo-Sri Lanka relations. India from time to time complained against the discriminatory policy of the Ceylon government. The agreement of 1964 sought to solve the problem of stateless persons (Indian Tamils) in Sri Lanka.

About 3 lakhs of these people were to be granted Sri Lankan citizenship and about 5 lakh 25 thousand persons were to be given citizenship of India. These people were given 15 years time to shift to India in instalments.

Later in 1974, the fate of the rest 1 lakh 50 thousand stateless persons was decided. It was agreed between the two countries that half of them were to be given citizenship of Sri Lanka and rest would become Indian nationals. Thus, the issue of stateless persons was sorted out peacefully between the two countries.

A territorial dispute arose between India and Sri Lanka over the ownership of one mile India and the World long and only 300 yard wide small island known as Kacchativu, in 1968. In 1974 under the agreement signed between the two countries, India accepted Sri Lankan ownership of the island.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

Question 16.
Short Notes on Tamil Separatism.
Answer:
The ethnic problem between Tamils and Sinhalese had a long history. It assumed serious proportions in 1983. As the gulf between the communities developed, militancy, separatist organisations became active. Tamil United Liberation Front (TULF) demanded separate homeland for Tamils in 1988 – Tamil Eelam. A reign of terror was unleashed against the agitating Tamils in 1983. During 1983 – 86, about 2 lakh Tamils were rendered homeless. The worst racial riots in the history of the country made thousands of Tamils refugees in India.

India offered to help resolve the crisis but it was interpreted as “Indian intervention in Sri Lanka” on behalf of the Tamils. When the situation became grim, India and Sri Lanka signed an agreement in 1987. India offered military assistance under the Accord. Indian Peace Keeping Force (IPKF) was sent to Sri Lanka to help restore normalcy in the country.

The deployment of IPKF was also an extension of India’s policy of reminding Sri Lanka and outside powers that if their involvement inside the region were to have an anti-Indian orientation, New Delhi would not remain a mute spectator.

Though the accord of 1987 was a triumph of Indian diplomacy, it proved to be costly for India. India lost about 1200 soldiers and it costed Rs. 2 crore a day on IPKF in the height of its involvement. The worst part was that the Tamils turned against IPKF and a fighting broke out between the two. Rajiv Gandhi, the architect of India-Sri Lanka Accord of 1987 was assassinated in 1991 at the behest of LTTE (Liberation Tigers of Tamil Eelam) leader, Velupillai Prabhakaran.

Question 17.
Short notes on Areas of Mutual Cooperation.
Answer:
Systematic efforts at strengthening economic ties have been taken by India and Sri Lanka since the 1990s, especially after the withdrawal of Indian troops. In 1998, the two countries set up an Indo Sri Lankan Foundation for increasing bilateral exchanges in various fields. They have agreed on a free trade area to facilitate trade, which has gone up greatly.

India encouraged Sri Lanka to invite the peace process between the Tamils and the Sinhalese. In 1998 Sri Lanka invited Norway to work out a peaceful solution to the ethnic problem. India stands for unity of Sri Lanka The greatest milestone of this process was the cease-fire agreement of2002 between LTTE and Sri Lanka and the revival of the dialogue between the two.

From India’s long term point of view, Norway recognised India’s legitimate interests in Sri Lanka and stated that it has no desire to come in the way of any Indian initiative to end the conflict in the region.

Question 18.
Trace the origins of the United Nations (UN).
Answer:
The first half of the twentieth century witnessed two World Wars that caused death to 80million people. Each of those wars strengthened the determination of world leaders and people to set up institutions for peaceful world. Even before the complete defeat of the enemy countries (viz. Germany, Japan, and Italy)in the Second World War, the allied powers led by the USA, former Soviet Union and the UK started planning an organization in place of the League of Nations.

The US president, Roosevelt’ and the British Prime Minister, Winston Churchill signed the Atlantic Charter in August 1941 indicating their desire for a post-war peace institution.

Then, a series of conferences followed at Moscow, Teheran, Dumbarton Oaks and Yalta to discuss various ideas and proposals. Finally, the United States hosted the San Francisco Conference in early 1945 to finalise and sign the Charter of the new organisation, the ‘United Nations’.

The United Nations was established on 24th October 1945. Since then, we celebrate 24th October as UN Day. The Charter is the Constitution of the United Nations. It lists the purposes of the organization,the principles guiding the conduct of both the United Nations and its member countries, the principal organs along with their composition and powers.

Question 19.
Purposes and Principles of the organisation of UN.
Answer:
The Charter indicates, at the very beginning, four broad objectives of the United Nations. They are:

  • to maintain international peace and security through collective measures for
    suppression of aggression and through peaceful settlement of disputes;
  • to develop friendly relations among countries based on full respect for the principle of equality and self-determination;
  • to achieve international cooperation in the economic, social, cultural or humanitarian fields, and
  • to encourage respect for “human rights and fundamental freedoms.

In pursuit of the above objectives, both the United Nations and its member states are required to adhere to a set of important guiding principles. The foremost among them is the principle of equality among countries whether big or small, strong or weak. The United Nations will not interfere in the domestic matters of the member countries.

The member states of the United Nations are expected to resolve their disputes with other states in a peaceful manner without endangering international peace and security. Further, the member states should refrain from threats or use of force against another member. It is the duty of the members to assist the United Nations in the enforcement of peace.

As we have already noted, the maintenance of international peace and security is a very important purpose of the UN. Other purposes are complementary to the purpose of peace. In discussing the role of the UN, we should bear in mind one basic aspect of the world body. It is a political body serving its member governments in the context of global politics. Neither the preferences of governments, nor the trends in international politics are static; they change from time to time.

Hence, in the exercise of its powers, the UN cannot be rigid, mechanical or uniform. The role of the UN is marked, therefore, by flexibility and pragmatism. Generally, the UN preferred not to take a harsh view or condemn the aggressor country whenever it received complaints on a breach of peace. Instead, it directed its efforts to stop the fighting immediately and to seek withdrawal of troops to pre-war locations.

Question 20.
The composition and function of General Assembly.
Answer:
Among the principal organs, the General Assembly is the central body. The principles of sovereign equality and universality are embodied in its composition. All members of the United Nations (presently! 91) are members of the General Assembly. Irrespective of size or strength, every member has one vote in the Assembly.

A vote cast by the United States, for example, is equivalent to the vote of Bhutan or Cuba. The Assembly discusses problems brought to it, makes recommendations on peace and security questions, admits new members, and adopts UN budget. On important matters, it adopts resolutions with the support of two-third majority. Procedural decisions require only a simple majority. The Assembly meets in regular session every year. It has convened 59 such sessions so far.

The Assembly also meets, when need arises, in special sessions and emergency special sessions. The General Assembly is some times called as the world parliament. It can discuss any matter. It discusses matters which include peace and security questions, environmental protection, economic development, problems of colonial administration, disarmament, refugees, population explosion, use of global commons like outer space and deep seaboard.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

It can only make recommendations. As part of this function, the Assembly has adopted a number of important declarations containing principles of international cooperation in political, economic, social and other matters. The Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948), the Declaration on Decolonisation (1960), Declaration on New International Economic Order (1974), Declaration on Rights of the Child (1989), Declaration on International Terrorism (1994) are only a few examples.

They are common goals desirable for governments to implement in their national policies and programmes. The Declarations are not binding on countries. Yet, they carry great moral and political weight. Therefore, governments find it difficult to ignore them.

The Assembly has also adopted several laws like the covenant on civil, political, economic rights of individuals, the laws of exploitation of seas, laws prohibiting or controlling chemical and biological weapons, and so on. These laws are not like the laws of our Parliament which are automatically binding on all of us whereas these international laws and convention sare legally binding only on those states that agree to comply with them.

The Assembly elects members of various organiser: It appoints the Secretary General. It supervises the work of the Economic and Social Council, the Security Council, the Trusteeship Council and other bodies. The Assembly has the power to approve the budget of the United Nations and to apportion the amount among all the member countries.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

Question 21.
The composition and function of Security Council.
Answer:
The Security Council is the most powerful decision-making body of the United Nations. It has the main responsibility to maintain international peace and security. The Council is a contrast from the General Assembly, in respect of both its composition and the decision-making procedure. Unlike the Assembly, the membership of the Council is limited to 15 countries only, out of which five are permanent members. These five countries are China, France, Russia, the UK and the USA.

The remaining ten members- called non-permanent members are elected by the General Assembly for a term of two years. They represent different geographical regions of the world like Asia, Africa, Latin America, Western and Eastern Europe. It was initially hoped that its small size could make it easy for the Council to take decisions on procedural matters by nine affirmative votes (simple majority).

On substantive questions, the nine affirmative votes should include concurring vote of the permanent members. In other words, the Council cannot take decisions of major significance if any one of the five permanent members casts a negative vote. This special privilege of the permanent members is popularly known as the veto power. To abstain from voting in the Security Council is not veto.

The veto provision has faced criticism from the very beginning. The veto power dilutes the principle of sovereign equality of member countries. The power and functions of the Security Council are limited to the task of maintenance of international peace and security. In case, a dispute arises between two or more countries the Council can make appropriate recommendations in the interest of peaceful settlement of the dispute.

Nevertheless, these recommendations are not binding on the unwilling states. For example, on the Jammu and Kashmir dispute, the Security Council resolutions are not legally binding on either India or Pakistan unless both countries willingly accept them. The Council can use extraordinary power to deal with wars or threats of war between countries.

In such an event, the Council can determine who the aggressor is and can call for necessary steps to restore peace. These steps may include, at the discretion of the Council, economic sanctions like freezing of assets abroad, banning of exports and imports, or military action by land, sea or air.

Notably, whenever the Security Council takes such steps, they are binding not only on the states directly involved in the war but also on all members of the United Nations. Once, the Security Council takes a decision, it is the duty of the member countries to carry out decisions. Obviously, the Council can take such important decisions only with the agreement among the permanent members. In the recent years, after the end of the cold war, the Council has frequently used its binding powers to deal with various problems of international peace and security.

The role of the Security Council in discharging its functions depends on the specific circumstances of each case and the existence of broad agreement among the five permanent members. It is important to note that the Security Council has imposed varying sets of economic and diplomatic sanctions against 25 countries so far. These sanctions included cutting off diplomatic relations, stopping of oil imports and exports, banning weapons supplies, freezing of assets abroad, etc.

Haiti, Iraq, Libya, Somalia, South Africa were among the targets of these sanctions. Since no armed forces are placed under the UN to fight an aggressor even after five decades of the Charter’s commitment to it, it has requested member countries to contribute towards such a force to take military action for restoring peace.

Question 22.
The Economic and Social Council.
Answer:
The Economic and Social Council works to promote international cooperation in economic and social fields. It comprises 54 members all of whom are elected for a term of three years by the General Assembly, giving representation to various geographical regions. Decisions are taken by a simple majority of members present and voting. It considers international economic, social, cultural and humanitarian problems. The Council has set up commissions to study and advise on the status of women, population, human rights, etc.

It has the power to coordinate the activities of various specialized agencies like the International Labour Organisation, the World Health Organisation etc. (which are discussed in a separate lesson in this book). Another important function of the Council is to bring Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) to take part in its deliberations.

The powers of the Council are quite modest as compared to its responsibilities. By means of study, discussion and coordination, the Council is expected to promote full employment, higher standards of living and solution of international economic and social problems.

Question 23.
The Trusteeship Council.
Answer:
The Trusteeship Council was created to supervise the working of the international trusteeship system. All the 11 territories, originally placed under the trusteeship system have become free. Now that there is no trust territory to be administered, the Trusteeship Council has ceased to play an active role in the UN system and does not hold meetings. The Charter has to be amended to dissolve this organ.

Question 24.
The International Court of Justice.
Answer:
The International Court of Justice, known as the World Court, located at The Hague (The Netherlands), is the principal judicial organ of the United Nations. The Court consists of 15 judges; who are elected jointly by the General Assembly and the Security Council for a term of nine years. Let us not confuse this court with national court like the Supreme Court of India. Only member nations, not private individuals, can bring cases before the Court. And the judgements are not binding. So far the Court has handled 72 cases.

Question 25.
The Secretariat.
Answer:
The Secretariat General comprises the international staff posted at the UN headquarters, New York and other locations throughout the world. They are expected to be impartial and independent in the discharge of their responsibilities, the United Nations and not any particular member country.

The Chief of the Secretariat is the Secretary General who is appointed by the General Assembly on the recommendation of the Security Council for a term of five years. Since the inception of the Organization, six persons have served as the Secretary-General.

They are; Trygve Lie of Norway, Dag Hammarskjold of Sweden (1953 – 61), U Thant of Myanmar (1961 – 71), Kurt Waldheim of Austria (1972 – 96) and Javier Perez De Cuellar of Peru (1982 – 91) Boutros Boutros-Ghali of Egypt (1992 – 96) Kofi Annan from Ghana. Presently, Ban Kimoon of South Korea is occupying this prestigious office.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

Question 26.
Fight against Colonialism and Racism.
Answer:
As we know India was a British colony for nearly 200 years before Independence in 1947 India was not alone to come under colonial rule. Most parts of Africa and Asia. were not free in 1945 when the United Nations was set up. For UN, ending colonial rule became essential for achieving world peace and progress. Freeing millions of people from foreign colonial rule is a historic achievement of the UN.

The UNs anti-colonial territories covered two categories of dependent population. They were the trust territories for which UN was directly responsible. Then there were several territories administered by western colonial powers like Britain, France, etc.

‘Trust’ territories were placed under the responsibility of the UN until the people of the territories concerned would be able to determine freely their future status. Cameroon, Nauru, New Guinea, the Pacific Islands, Rwanda-Urundi, Somaliland, Tanganyika, Togoland were among them. By 1994 all trust territories became free with the help provided by the UN.

Seven have become independent and four chose to merge with the neighbouring countries. The UN interest in the liberation for subject people extended beyond trust territories.

Its built up this campaign against colonialism was the adoption of the Declaration of Decolonisation by the General Assembly in 1960, demanding immediate independence of all colonial territories and populations. Since that time, 60 territories have become free under the sustained pressure built in the UN.

Namtria, Eritrea, East Timor are among the recent examples of successful fight against colonialism. There are now only very few like western Sahara waiting to exercise their free choice. There is some confusion that the fight against colonialism blesses the right of some disgruntled people to separate from their newly formed independent state. Right to- ‘self-determination’ applies to people under foreign colonial rule only.

The UN opposition to racism in South Africa known as apartheid-is also remarkable. The organizations interest in the matter dates back to early 1946. South African white minority regime did not pay heed to the gentle pleas by the UN. Later pressure was built to force white South African government to end its policy of discrimination against the Black population.

South African teams were passed to participate in international sports events. The Security Council joined the effort later by banning arms sales. South Africa felt the heat and agreed to end its policy in 1993. The widely respected black leader, Nelson Mandela was released after 27 years of imprisonment. The apartheid laws were revoked.

Internationally supervised free elections were held, leading to the installation of a government under President Mandela in 1994. Soon afterwards, the UN revoked all previous punishments and restored to the new South Africa its rightful place in the world body.

Question 27.
Promotion of Human Rights.
Answer:
Promotion of human rights culture through worldwide human rights standards has been another major contribution of the United Nations. Nearly 80 declarations and conventions touching upon various facets of human rights have been adopted by the UN in the past five decades. The Universal Declaration of Human Rights was the first among the UN declarations.

The day of its adoption-10 December 1948 is observed every year as the Human Rights day. The Declaration contains a broad range of civil, political, economic, social and cultural rights that all people are entitled to, without any discrimination. Admittedly, the Universal
Declaration, as any declaration, is not binding on governments.

However, it gave inspiration to the drafting of two legally binding covenants, one on economic, social and cultural rights and the other on civil and political rights. Both these covenants became applicable to the signatory states from 1976 onwards. These two covenants, together with the universal declaration, are known as ‘the International Bill of Rights.

The covenant on economic, social and cultural rights highlights the right to work in just condition, the right to adequate standard of living and the right to social protection. The Covenant on civil and political rights emphasizes freedom of movement, equality before the law, freedom of religion, freedom of participation in elections, and protection of minority rights.

A specially constituted committee monitors the compliance of the signatory states to this covenant on HR. A remarkable feature is the UN is empowered under the civil and political rights covenant to receive and redress complaints from individuals against the behavior of their own respective governments.

The UN has adopted other declarations and covenants with the aim of stopping the practice of torture and racial discrimination or protecting vulnerable section like children, women and migrant workers

The activities of the UN include the convening of periodical conferences on human rights. Recently, in 1993 the UN organized at Vienna an international conference on Human rights. Acting upon the recommendations of the conference, the General Assembly appointed in 1994 the UN high commissioner for HR whose task is to promote more scrupulous respect for human rights throughout the world.

Question 28.
Need for Re-Structureing the United Nation.
Answer:
Although the United Nations has done a responsible job there are some obstacles which limit its performance. For example, a few organs of the United Nations have not changed, though the changes in the world around require it. Let us look at the Security Council as an example. Unlike the General Assembly; the permanent membership of the Security CounciLis limited to 15 countries only.

Out of that, P-5 (China, France, Russia, UK and USA) are permanent. They were given permanent status in 1945 due to some historical arid political reasons. The remaining ten members are non-permanent members elected by the General Assembly for a term of two years. This arrangement is six decades old, when most of Africa and Asian countries were not part of the United Nations. Now with membership of the world body rising by four times, the council’s composion needs to be suitably changed.

There is a strong case to add a few countries like India as permanent members. The member of non-permanent members should also be increased so that different countries can get a feeling that the Council works for their future. The Third World countries are of the opinion that United Nations is an agent of Western countries especially the United States. To correct this image, the number of Permanent members has to be increased.

Japan, India, Germany, Brazil and Nigeria are the claimant for it. Japan and Germany are no longer enemy states and because of their economic strength and contribution to the UN budget are considered as the most eligible for permanent membersnip of the Security Council. India’s contribution in several UN Peacekeeping forces and its active role in peace making processes facilitates its obvious claim to be a permanent member of the Council.

India has been a founder member of the United Nations. Besides India is the second largest populous country and is the largest democracy in the world.

Question 29.
Explain the working of the United Nations Development programme (UNDP).
Answer:
The United Nations structure for planning, coordinating, administering and implementing its economic and social programmes is vast and decentralized. At the apex of the structure are the General Assembly and the Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC). The General Assembly provides general direction and supervision for economic and social activities.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

ECOSOC concentrates solely on this work and has operated with the assistance of functional commissions. These are the Statistical Commission, Human Rights Commission, the Commission on the Status of Women, the Commission for Social Development, the Commission on Narcotic Drugs.

There are also regional economic commissions, which focus on the problems salient to their geographical areas. Five such commissions have been established: the Economic Commission for Europe (ECE); the Economic Commission for Asia and the Pacific (ESC AP), the Economic Commission for Latin America, the Economic Commission for Africa (ECA) and the Economic Commission for Western Asja.

A number of other bodies exist in the economic and. social field which are not as directly subject to ECOSOC direction or control but which are closely related to ECOSOC activities.

These agencies include :
(1) the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP)
(2) The United Nations International Children’s Emergency Fund (UNICEF)
(3) The United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNCR)
(4) The United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD)
(5) The United Nations Industrial Development Organization (UNIDO)
(6) World Food Programme
(7) The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP).

There are Specialized Agencies of the United Nations. Though these agencies are part of the UN system, they function independently of United Nations organs and are generally described as autonomous organizations. Each has its own headquarters, constitution, staff and budget. Each was created in the same manner as the United Nations by an international conference. Membership of these specialized agencies and membership of the United Nations is not identical.

These agencies are universal in membership. States which are not UN members can be admitted as the members of the specialized agencies (see box) Each specialized Agency is an inter-government agency and is established by international treaty or by an agreement between the agency and the United Nations.

This agreement is negotiated between the agency and ECOSOC subject to approval by the General Assembly. There are about 15 specialized agencies, which operate in affiliation with the United Nations, we shall identify and describe the activities of following UN development agencies, such as UNDP, UNICEF, the World Health Organization (WHO), the United National Educational Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) and the World Bank.

Question 30.
Describe the role of UNICEF in promoting the welfare of children.
Answer:
Created in 1946, UNICEF concentrates exclusively on the task of improving the lot of disadvantaged children. UNICEF has undertaken projects on health, education, malaria eradication, nutrition, rural development, family and child welfare and emergency aid to promote child welfare. In recognition of its social and humanitarian efforts, UNICEF was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize in 1965.

It focuses on India in a very big way. UNICEF has made an important contribution to a better environment for children in India and identified the problem of excess flouride in groundwater resources. Rajasthan and Andhra Pradesh are the most severely affected states.

CHSE Odisha Class 12 Political Science Unit 4 India in World Politics Long Answer Questions

WHO’s aims are: (i) preventing the spread of disease, (ii) curing disease and (iii) preventing the outbreak of disease. The means adopted to prevent the spread of disease include Conventions providing international standards for public health.

WHO’s has been a clearing house for scientific knowledge and a exchange of information for curing disease. WHO’s activity in the area of preventing the outbreak of disease is to facilitate the exchange of findings and promotion of research.

It has encouraged research with cheap preventatives, especially vaccines for tuberculosis and DDT for malaria. The campaign against malaria has been one of WHO’s biggest all-out programme.

Since heterosexual transmission of the human immune deficiency virus (HIV) that causes AIDS is becoming the predominant mode of spread of HIV in most countries of the world, WHO is engaged in research for vaccine to cure AIDS for which it needs necessary financial support from rich member countries to meet the challenge of this deadly disease.

A very important WHO programme is Polio Eradication Immunization. Polio is the first disease of the 21 st century to be eradicated. Another important campaign of UN health agency, WHO is against the use of tobacco especially in developing countries.

The Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO) concentrates on rural development. This Rome based agency works for alleviation of poverty and hunger by promoting agriculture development, improved nutrition and easy access of food. The international Labour Organization (ILO) helps nations in enhancing the living and working standards of industrial workers.

UN Industrial Development Organization strives for industrial development of developing countries in the era of globalization. With the end of the Second World War, came the conviction that wars begin in the minds of men and the ignorance fosters suspicions and hatreds on which wars breed. It was felt that international collaboration could bring knowledge and greater understanding among people.

Question 31.
Describe the functions of the World Bank as the main UN financial agency for Development.
Answer:
Some of the programmes of the various UN agencies discussed in the previous section entail substantial financial contributions to the purpose of development. For example, an annual budget of approximately 670 million dollars for UNDP is devoted exclusively to aiding the development process. Capital is a primary component for development. The most important financial agencies of the United Nation are the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD) or World Bank and the International Monetary Fund (IMF).

These are also called the Bretton Words institutions as these agencies came into being in December 1945 at the Bretton Woods Conference held in New Hampshire, USA. IMF provides temporary funds to aid governments in correcting balance of payment deficits. The World Bank group is the largest multilateral source of funds for development projects for infrastructure development. About 300 billion dollars worth of aid has been given so far for development projects.

However, the World Bank and the IMF are under severe criticism. They are dominated by rich countries. They are also not accountable to the United Nations. Their composition is not democratic. Voting in these institutions is not based on the principle of one nation one vote as in the General Assembly. There is weighted voting i.e. a member country’s number of votes are as per the amount of financial contribution or shares in these bodies.

World Bank’s loan falls into two broad categories. Investment loans are long-term loans aimed to create the physical and social infrastructure necessary for poverty reduction and sustainable development. World Bank loans helped developing countries to construct basic education schools. Other projects include poverty reduction, rural development, water and sanitation, natural resource management and health. Investment loans have accounted for 75 to 80 percent of all World Bank lending.

Adjustment loans have become an important component of World Bank lending and are short-term loans to promote the market structures as well as political institutional reform. During the last 20 years, adjustment loans have accounted for between 20 and 25 percent of all World Bank lending.

Other important sources of multilateral financing for development include regional banks, such as the Inter- American Development Bank and the Asian Development Bank, have been major sources of development financing for hundred of projects within their respective regions.